JP7277035B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the stationary display of seven symbols in the decorative symbol display device.

JP 2014-147575 A

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the big win start effect, it is configured to issue a right hitting instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball to the right by operating the ball shooting handle. There is still room for improvement with respect to such an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an instruction prompting a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction. be.

(A) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information, deriving and displaying display results, and controlling the game machine to an advantageous state for the player,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium according to a player's operation;
Guidance display means for performing a guidance display urging the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area;
guidance light emitting means for emitting guidance light to prompt the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area by moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
As the variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed , the special identification information different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display is restarted. a specific effect executing means capable of executing the effect;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the special identification information temporarily stops ;
A notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped ,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
performing the second guidance display in a first period of a predetermined period during which a start effect relating to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed;
performing the first guide display and the second guide display in a second period during the predetermined period and later than the first period;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is performed while the first guidance display is terminated;
performing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
The guidance light emitting means is
In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the guide light emission,
extinguishing the light emitting means before the second period starts;
When the second period starts, the first guide display is performed and the guide light is emitted;
The suggestive effect executing means is in a visual recognition state in which the special identification information and the effect identification information can be visually recognized by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect. After being temporarily lowered to the first low visibility state, the visibility is lowered to the second low visibility state, which is a visibility state in which the special identification information and the effect identification information are visible even though the visibility is lower than that of the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute a production that causes
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect,
When the special identification information does not temporarily stop after the suggestive effect is executed, the moving speed of the special identification information before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the special identification information after the predetermined timing.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) a plurality of types of performance identification information (eg, decorative symbols) including specific performance identification information (eg, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display results, and an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled (for example, a jackpot game state),
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed,
moreover,
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1 After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is made invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 (The part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment about the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed,
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect) (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5). The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect without being affected by
moreover,
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that a temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment due to the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the inventions according to the following means A and B. Conventionally, it is possible to execute variable display of decorative symbols (effect identification information) as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-131876 in a game machine, and pseudo-continuous symbols (specified There are those that can execute pseudo-continuous effects (specific effects) including temporary stop of effect identification information) and re-variable display.

However, since no effect is executed when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, it is not possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to increase the player's sense of exhilaration.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the player's sense of anticipation and heightening the player's sense of excitement. .

The game machine of means A is
A plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo consecutive patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display the display results, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1 After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is rendered invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 also the part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of means B is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characterizing part of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory diagram showing a special figure LED board and a fourth symbol unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during hit variation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big hit. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp|ramp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko gaming machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from power failure during the fanfare production|presentation by special figure 1 hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during 1 round of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 1 big hit at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure during two rounds of big hits at the time of one special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 2 rounds of big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of recovering from power failure between the rounds after 3 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure during the 4 big hit rounds at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from power failure between the rounds after 4 big hits at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of resetting from power failure during the jackpot final round at the time of 1 special figure hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko game machine in the case of returning from power failure during the ending production at the time of special figure 1 hit. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows operation|movement of a 2nd movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for pending storage of a big hit, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for pending storage of a loss. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of each effect period and effect contents in the pseudo-continuous effect; (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not the announcement effect is executed and the decision ratio of the announcement effect to be executed. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not the announcement effect is executed and the decision ratio of the announcement effect to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing a special temporary stop notification effect execution determination ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing a temporary stop notification effect period determination ratio. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an output mode of sound output from a speaker; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display mode of each image during a temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of each image during a temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; It is explanatory drawing of the change of the visibility of the decoration design on either side in the temporary stop suggestion production|presentation period and the temporary stop notification production|presentation period. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of image data forming a display on an image display device in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the transparency of a saturated line and an effect image in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example;

<Basic description>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

[Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

In addition, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also called "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is "second special symbol". It is also called 2 special pattern” or “second special pattern”. Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first start winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the winning probability of a big win and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be constructed using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls awarded to the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls won in the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Overview of game progress]
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a big hit pattern, for example, "7", the actual pattern varies depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a "big hit" and a big hit pattern. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state at the time of some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning mouth is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning mouth is also the same etc.) to open the big prize mouth. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period in which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the termination conditions, such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big win game state, is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut short time, number of times cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variable state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which is more reliable than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big win'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined small winning combination (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect that foretells the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state of the same mode as the small winning game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, the power board 17 connected to the power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (for example, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display 20, first reserve It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) are executed by effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 etc., and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and settings for making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), after executing the initialization process (step S6), the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 The setting change process of step S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. . If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is OFF when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is OFF, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining variation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (such as the type of reach production), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big win, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the probability of winning a big win. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. As a result, when the high probability state such as the probability variable state in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the low probability state such as the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is increased. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, it is determined so that the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state will be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination value is regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) may be provided. A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to an effect switch (for executing a predetermined effect each time a game ball passes through a predetermined area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, CTC register settings. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 for the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decoration pattern is read out from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decoration pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern corresponding to the production content in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit mid-effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end effect. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small-hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small-hit game state based on the setting contents. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

[Modified example of basic explanation]
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

<Description on Characteristic Portion 075F>
Next, the game machine according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Configuration of pachinko game machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F]
It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 10-4). (usually called a large winning opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A large prize winning opening door is provided, and the large winning opening door slides horizontally between the inner side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the path to the normal large winning opening for the game balls. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door is slid to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V-variable winning ball device 075F007B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 10-4). V big prize opening) is formed.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning entrance door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning entrance door is located between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 10-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V big prize opening. . By detecting the game ball by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. That is, in the present embodiment, V winning occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . Incidentally, the normal big prize opening and the V big prize opening are also collectively referred to as the big prize opening. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps on a game board 2.例文帳に追加Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 1, in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, an attacker upper lamp 075F009U, a left lower lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2, a board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a A board left lamp 075F009E is provided.

The movable body lamp 9d lights or flashes a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or an operating state, so that characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example "XXX") is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light near the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light near the lower left corner of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a character-like housing, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the character-like housing on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a character-like housing, like the board right lamp 075F009F. Also, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

A pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps in a game machine frame 3. - 特許庁Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a frame lamp made up of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. Prepare.

Here, FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, extending counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has a group of 11 lamps, 1st to 11th lamps, clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3 . The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), thereby causing the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. - 特許庁The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED board 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 10-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 that indicates the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable that indicates the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, special figure 2 memory display part showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game 075F024, a normal pattern storage display unit 075F025 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, a normal pattern display unit 075F026 showing variable display of normal patterns, a right hitting display unit 075F030 prompting the player to hit right, and a variable state , a time saving display portion 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display portion 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can urge the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishment of lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 075F030. In the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 lights (lights up), and when not prompting the player to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hitting display section 075F030 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display part 075F030 is extinguished. Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-hand hitting display section 075F030 only during the big win round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 075F030.

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow-down path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into. In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state and variable probability state), the player hits to the right, and is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball is allowed to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during this time, the right-handed display section 075F030 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is displayed, thereby causing the game balls to enter the second start prize-winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 memory display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. Special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the second reserved storage number, Special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 indicating the status or display result of the variable display of the first special figure, The situation of the variable display of the second special figure or It has a special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 showing the display result and a right hitting display portion 075F055 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means. Below, it is also called the variable display of the 1st special design to represent the variation of the stop design of the 1st special design by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) to indicate that the player should hit to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 is extinguished. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for effect control lights the right-handed display part 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the design is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the big win game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may light up the right-hand hitting display section 075F055 only during the big win round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 extinguishes the right-handed display portion 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the right board lamp 075F009F, the left board lamp 075F009E, the right frame lamp 075F009R, and the left frame lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also called effect lamp 9 .

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and is capable of lighting (blinking) each display portion under the control of the control CPU 120. FIG.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (flashed) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays a first reserved memory display area 075F005D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved indications, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved indications of the circle. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first reserved memory number, and a display of the second reserved memory number. are doing.

At the center of the first display area 075F005F, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged, and the variable display of the decorative patterns can be executed. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, a decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. In the part, it is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 075F005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8.

(jackpot type)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 10-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the big win, there is a big win probability after the end of the big win game state, a base after the end of the big win game state, and a fluctuation time after the end of the big win game state. , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win V The game ball is not allowed to enter a specific area by repeating the opening and closing of the box, etc.), and after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed, the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state. In the normal jackpot, either the condition that such a low probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is established. continue until

The 5R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high-probability state and a high-base state after five rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 10R probability variable jackpot is a control pattern in which the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is easy to win V ), which is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state is completed. In the probability variable jackpot, either the condition that such a high probability/high base state is executed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is established. continue until

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have common decorative symbols that stop when the jackpot occurs. In addition, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot have common fanfare effects (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs. The performance mode of the round performance (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effect, etc.) is common to each other, and the number of rounds of the big win game state is also common to each other. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize which of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred as long as he sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare effect, and the round effect. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (4R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable probability jackpot make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the variable probability jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round, so these jackpots are also called chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round) in the same manner as the 5R probability variable jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V big winning hole by striking to the right with the aim of the V big winning hole, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs, the fanfare production mode (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.) and the round production that is performed during the round of the jackpot game state is different from the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot. Therefore, when the 10R variable probability big win occurs, the player can recognize that the variable probability big win has occurred. Such a 10R probability variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for judging whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to the upper limit of 65535, and then updated from 0 again. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type to be one of the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for variation pattern type determination) that determines the type (type) of the variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (variation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for random 4 initial value determination).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which of a plurality of types of jackpots such as a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, and a 10R probability variable jackpot as a jackpot gaming state is selected based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot pattern may also be determined based on the random 1 value.

Also, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 4) is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Also, if it is a loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type that does not involve reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a variation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection rate of the variation pattern type is different between when it is in the time saving state and when it is not in the time saving state (in the time saving state, compared to when it is not in the time saving state Therefore, the percentage of selecting a variation pattern type with a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is set high). Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed is a predetermined number or more and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the reserved memory number of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable display is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of reserved number reduction control for shortening the variable display time compared to when the reserved memory number of each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it For example, in the hold number reduction control state, compared to when it is not in the hold number reduction control state, it is set so that the rate of selecting a fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as a normal fluctuation pattern type is higher , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened compared to when the number of holds reduction control state is not in effect. Further, in the hold number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened compared to when the hold number reduction control state is not performed.

Also, the variation pattern may be a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery instead of the two-stage determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 10-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with the random R are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value listed in the left column of FIG. 10-8 (A) is set as the jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, the right of FIG. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (called the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variable jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variable jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the game is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). ), it is decided to make a big hit (a normal big win or a variable probability big win) with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

FIGS. 10-8 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table. FIG. 10-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 10-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , and "10R probability variable jackpot" are set with corresponding jackpot determination values. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variable jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 (B) and (C), the big hit type determination value is also used as a judgment value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit design of the first special design and the second special design. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "1". The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7". The special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 are such that the lighting means such as LED lights or blinks in a lighting mode corresponding to each big hit pattern, so that the stopped jackpot pattern can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by the lighting means such as LED lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot pattern can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the ratio of selecting "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than the jackpot types selectable with the first special symbol for the jackpot with the second special symbol, and the player The ratio of selecting the jackpot type that is advantageous for the player is high.

(Production control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, the 1st byte indicates MODE (class of command), and the 2nd byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10-9 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variable jackpot is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variable jackpot is determined. Each of the losing designation command, the 5R normal jackpot designation command, the 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and the 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the first special figure. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start the variation display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command. A command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, and a jackpot start 3 designation command, or these commands are also collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the results of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there will be a big hit at the time of start-up winning, and determines the range of determination values of the type of the big win and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of the big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is provided with a first pending storage buffer (storage buffer for storing pending storage information of the first special symbol) or a second pending storage buffer (second special It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N at step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step 075FS002). When the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal process is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y at step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

According to the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or Second reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 10-8) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the probability variable jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers on the right side of FIG. 10-8 (A) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 10-8(A) are set) is provided which is set to be smaller than the time jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 10-8(A). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the probability variable flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big-hit determination values (N at step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

In step 075FS011, if the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the big-hit determination values, the CPU 103 sets a big-hit flag indicating a big hit (step 075FS012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining any one of a plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8 (B) and the second table in FIG. 10-8 (C) One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging the type of jackpot extracted in the starting winning judgment process and pre-stored in the first holding memory buffer or the second holding memory buffer, and uses the jackpot type judgment table selected in step 075FS013 to hold the random number. A jackpot type and a jackpot pattern corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for judging the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer is determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 (B) and (C), for the first special symbols and the second special symbols, the relationship between the jackpot types and the jackpot patterns is set so that the jackpot patterns are different for each jackpot type. Since the big win type and the big win pattern are determined at the same time, the corresponding relation between the big win pattern and the game control according to the big win type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop pattern of the special patterns according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``3'' is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a big hit variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big hit type, and when the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a losing variation pattern. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. to decide.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-12 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y at step 075FS202), changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is terminated.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022. Control for deriving and displaying the pattern is performed (step 075FS301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a pattern confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, when the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the RO 101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), Data indicating the release mode such as interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 5th rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Further, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set in the big winning hole control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step 075FS303 (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving frequency counter indicating the remaining fluctuation frequency of the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving frequency counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. At step 075FS311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N at step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the variable probability flag is set (Y at step 075FS313), the variable probability flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the game state shifting from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set at step 075FS313 (N at step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the processing of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening pretreatment)
FIG. 10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-14, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS402), the process is terminated.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS402), a special winning opening open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-15 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y at step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined at step 075FS503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N at step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize opening or the V big prize opening is open (Y at step 075FS503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N at step 075FS504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is ON (Y at step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (updated by addition) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable probability determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when a V winning occurs. If the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V prize switch 075F024 is on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N at step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y at step 075FS507), set the probability variation determination flag (step 075FS508), transmit the probability variation determination device passage designation command (step 075FS509), and move to the processing of step 075FS510 do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N at step 075FS510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 clears (sets to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the process after opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to notify in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process exit.

At step 075FS601, if the value of the counter for the number of openings is not 0 (N at step 075FS601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V open round) in which the V big winning opening is opened, that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N at step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 and open the V big winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end control timer set with the jackpot end time (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N at step 075FS702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the variable probability determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. At step 075FS704, if the variable probability determination flag is set (Y at step 075FS704), the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability variation determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set to the time saving frequency counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether it is in any game state, variable probability, short time, or normal, by a variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

(Production processing during jackpot)
Next, processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 10-18, during the big hit effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, a flag such as a jackpot end designation command reception flag is set by the effect control CPU 120 when data indicating that the jackpot end designation command is received is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot is won. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N at step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y at step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). In addition, according to the content of the process data set next, the control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the content of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5 . . In addition, it outputs a control signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/blinking/extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 . Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continued according to the contents of the set process data. (step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data described above based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 . For example, when the production control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big win, the production control CPU 120 executes a fanfare production by controlling the production device. Set data. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display part 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is displayed to prompt the player to hit to the right. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a special winning opening open specification command (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the big win, the production during the round is executed by controlling the production device as follows. To do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning opening open specifying command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes the V probability variable suggesting effect suggesting whether or not the probability variable jackpot. set the process data of At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a command (A102 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 2R of the 5R variable probability jackpot, process data for executing the V variable probability suggestive effect (see FIG. 10-41). set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot open designation command (A102 (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V probability variation suggesting performance) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designation command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the V notice for notifying that the next 4R is the V open round. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 10-42). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103 A big win round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V notice performance) corresponding to the specified big win round is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIG. 10-43) to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot after opening the jackpot (A203 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round is set. Aim for the V effect is a guidance display using an image display regarding the V big prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the "Aim for V" effect, an image is displayed to urge the player to hit to the right so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V big winning opening, which is a specific area. In the "Aim for V" effect, an image pointing to the specific area of the V big prize opening itself may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening of the specific area may be displayed. , an image may be displayed that indicates the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when receiving a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability variable jackpot, continues to aim for V and executes the effect (see FIG. 10-44). Set the process data for At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 4R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a special winning mouth open designation command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the V notice effect for notifying that the next 9R is the V opening round is performed. Set process data for execution. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108 (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (V notice performance in this case) corresponding to the specified round during the big win is set.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the game ball enters the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect to aim at the V that makes you aim. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the designation command after opening the jackpot (A208 A command) is used to specify the finished big win round (in this case, 8R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the end of the specified big win round.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance aiming at the V continuously when receiving a special winning opening open designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 9R of the 10R probability variable jackpot. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and specifies the jackpot open designation command (A109 command) to specify a big win round (in this case, 9R), and set process data for executing a performance (in this case, aim for V) corresponding to the specified big win round.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the big hit round, the V winning effect is executed by the control of the effect device as follows. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

Effect control CPU 120, when receiving a variable probability determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from CPU 103 during 4R of 5R variable probability big hit, sets process data for executing V winning effect (see FIG. 10-44) .

The production control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning production when receiving the variable probability determination device passing designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R variable probability big hit.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the ending effect (FIGS. 10-46, 10) indicating the end of the jackpot game state -47)) to set the process data.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, thereby controlling the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, thereby performing various effects. perform the production of

[Overview of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 075F has the contents of the game performed in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already explained, the following description will be given in particular to the part of the game related to the characteristic part 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display portion 075F021 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed to urge the player to hit right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a figure (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage right-handed hitting. In addition to displaying the image, in the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050, lighting means such as LEDs are lit to prompt right hitting. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R variable variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of the 10R variable jackpot). One time opening of the big winning opening is determined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

In the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win V, there is no possibility of winning V. Also, since V is not won, the effect of aiming for V is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpots are opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggesting performance is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting effect, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is not the normal big hit. After that, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V prize is generated, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 5th round after that, and the ending performance is executed when the 5th round is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot, as in the 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening opens in the 1R and 2R, and in the 2R, the V probability variable that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 3rd round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is the V release round is executed. In the 4th R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of the 10R variable probability big hit, the normal big prize winning opening is opened in the 1st to 7th R, and the V probability variable suggesting effect is executed to suggest whether or not the probability variable big hit is in the 7th R. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggesting performance, it is notified that the probability variation big hit is achieved. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, and 150 times in the case of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot and the 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is changed to the variable probability state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) controlled to the time saving state. controlled by That is, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the game state after the jackpot round is the low-probability-high base state, and in the case of the 5R-probability-variable big win or the 10R-probability-variable big win, the game state after the big win round is the high-probability-high base state.

Even in the variable probability state and the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion performance even in the time saving state after the big win round is finished.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display portion 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win (also called consecutive chance win) occurs.

As described above, there is a 10R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot in the second special game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. It should be noted that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One time opening of the big winning opening is determined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Since it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, the big winning opening is usually opened in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Concretely, as in the case of the first hit, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the 8th round after that, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is the V open round is executed. In the ninth R, when the V big winning opening is opened and the game ball entering the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning occurs. As a result, the player is granted the right to control the game state to the probability variable state after the end of the big hit round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and a probability variable state (high probability and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot rounds in consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the short time state after the end of the big hit round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 075F030, and the right-handed display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
10-19 to 10-21, the timing of main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F will be described. FIGS. 10-19 are timing charts showing an example of processing during the winning variation. FIG. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a big win. FIG. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. 10-19 to 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a reserved storage number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command), display result designation command (8C system command), and variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

For example, the effect control CPU120, by specifying the number of first reserved storage based on the number of reserved storage designation command, or to update the display of the first reserved storage display area 075F005D, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 to update. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the game state under control based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the start of the variation of the special symbol based on the symbol variation specifying command, and sets the start timing of the effect. Also, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of the big win and the type of the big win based on the display result designation command, and determines the decoration pattern accordingly. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern designation command, the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the content of the effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, when a big hit occurs, at t3 thereafter, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right hand display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating a big win as fanfare effects, or outputs a sound congratulating a big win from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set the process data for In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image prompting right hitting, or outputs a sound prompting right hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right hitting promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, after that, when the big winning round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the production during the round in the 1Rth round.

After that, when the 1R-th game ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2R-th game starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 2Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V probability variation suggesting effect (see FIG. 10-41) based on the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A102 command).

After that, when the 2R-th game ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 10-42) based on the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command).

After that, when the 3R-th game ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing inter-round effects between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 10-43) based on the designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and also sends a special winning opening open specification command (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4Rth round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V advance notice effect (see FIG. 10-42) based on the special prize opening open designation command (A104 command), and then executes the aim for V effect (see FIG. 10-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when the V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V prize effect (see FIG. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5Rth game starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening open specification command (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect during the round in the 5Rth round.

After that, when the 5R-th game ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 . Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a short working time state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the second special symbol (for example, ready-to-win effect, notice effect, etc.) ), and set the process data for executing

On the other hand, when the reserved storage number does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 10-60) that can identify that no game is being played. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 10-60. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing how the lamp lights. In this embodiment, game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , The right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are turned off. Represented by

In the present embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the 4th pattern unit 075F050 are each lit up in white as shown in FIG. 10-22(B). represented in the form of

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, left lower lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth pattern unit 075F050 are lit/blinking/lit in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 10-22(C).

[Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. Figures 10-23 to 10-33 and Figures 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory diagrams showing the effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the variation of the special symbols in the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command), background designation command (95 system command), pattern variation designation command (8D system command) to the effect control CPU 120 ), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, or effects during variation according to the variation of the first special symbol (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 10-23(b1) to 10-24(b3), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect in FIG. 10-23(b1) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-23(b1) to 10-24(b3) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (b2), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect.

After that, when the variation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 and turns on the right hand display. Send a command (FD system command). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-38 (d2), the effect control CPU 120 uses a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-24(c1) to 10-38(d2) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

Here, the fanfare effect will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into a plurality of production parts. In the present embodiment, the fanfare effect includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The congratulatory part is a performance part in which a performance for congratulating the winning of a big win is executed. It is displayed, a sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to congratulate the big win. The name display part is an effect part for notifying the player of the start of the big win round by announcing the name of the big win game state that has occurred, as well as informing the player of the type of the big win game state that has occurred. -24 (c2), as will be described later in (c3), a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the big win is output from the speakers 8L, 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. The right-handed promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to hit right-handedly, and as will be described later with reference to FIGS. A large right-handed promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit right. The effect control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the big hit symbols are stopped and the symbols are determined, and then receives a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is performed until the normal big winning opening is opened and the big winning round is started.

As shown in FIG. 10-24(c1), an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!") is displayed as a congratulatory part in the fanfare production to congratulate the player on winning the jackpot. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that it is displayed on the device 5, the sound congratulating the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the big win. or In addition, as a right-handed promotion effect, an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and characters (in this example, the characters "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5 to promote small right-handed hitting. A performance is performed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers and can display a predetermined image on each layer. As shown in FIG. 10-24(c1), the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!"). is displayed in the layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side) than the character image of . In addition, in the fanfare effect, a sound that encourages right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed promotional effect, the right-handed display portion 075F030 and right-handed display portion 075F055 are lit in a manner that encourages right-handed hitting. (Lighting in this example). Note that the order of starting the above-described image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD-system command) after design determination, and lights up the right-handed display portion 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the received big hit start designation command (A0-series command), small right handed promotion performance The image display device 5 is caused to display an image consisting of graphics and characters in , and an image congratulating the winning of the jackpot. At this time, the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right hitting promotion performance located further to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big win. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display portion 075F030 and the right-handed display portion 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit are displayed in this order. An image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. is done until At that time, first, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display extinguishing designation command together with a background designating command after design determination, and turns off the right-handed display portion 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing designation command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion performance based on the received background designation command. When the process ends, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5 . It should be noted that the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may start and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of graphics and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, a part of the name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS !!" "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, sounds corresponding to the start of the big win are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big win. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), as a name display part in the fanfare effect, following FIG. “BONUS!!” in the character image of “CHANCE BONUS!!” is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 . As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off once before the large right-handed promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare performance starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 10-24 (c4) to FIG. 10-33 (c29), a graphic (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and a character (in this example, the character “Right-handed”) ) in the center of the image display device 5 in a large size.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121 . For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the effect control CPU 120 emits guidance light to urge the player to hit to the right by moving the light emitting position of the frame lamp. In the present embodiment, the light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is extinguished) is not called a light-emitting location. In another example, the light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness. A location may be called a location, but a location where a lamp that is lit with a luminance lower than that of a lamp positioned at the light emission location is not referred to as a light emission location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, board left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the fanfare effect and the hard right hitting promotion effect are defined respectively. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then a hard right hitting promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right hitting promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec long right hitting promotion effect twice. Become.

FIG. 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into the fanfare effect and the right-handed promotion effect, and is referred to in each time zone. grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right hitting promotion effect, the grandchild table W11 common to both the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated. In addition, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, a grandchild table is not provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. As for the attacker lamp 9c, the 2000 msec, which is the execution time for the promotion effect of hitting to the right, is subdivided into a plurality of periods, and a plurality of grandchild tables are specified. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 10-36 shows the data in grandchild table W11 for Frame Right Lamp 075F009R and Frame Left Lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 10-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. , data for turning off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 10B are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In FIG. 10-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown in order to clearly show the lighting period. A dashed circle mark is attached to it.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, the fourth lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L lights up first at T1, then the third lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L lights up at T2, and then the left frame lamp 075F009L lights up at T3. The second lamp lights up, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first at T46, the fourth lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T47 the third lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T48 the second lamp of the left frame lamp 075F009L is turned off, Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is extinguished, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is extinguished, and then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is extinguished, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, at T54, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. After all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are extinguished at all times.

Using the grandchild table W11 storing the data as described above, as shown in FIGS. , frame right lamp 075F009R up to the eighth lamp, the frame lamp lights up in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 shows the data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild table A11a-A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data are defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is defined. In the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, of the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, left X (left X), middle X (middle X), right X (right X) Data are provided for each of the In FIG. 10-37, for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000 ) are marked with dashed circles.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first, at T3, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is lit, then at T4, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is lit, and then at T5, the movable body lamp is lit. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting to light, each lamp continues to light while changing its color to seven colors. After that, first, at T48, the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then at T49, the X lamp in the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, and then at T50, the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. lights out. After that, each lamp is extinguished until 2000 msec in the one-time large right-handed promotion effect elapses. In addition, after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, the remaining time is only about 320 msec. (T57). Further, when compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain turned off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

10-25(c4) to 10-32(c24), the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L are While the movable body lamp 9d is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off. After that, at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. lights up, each lamp continues to light in seven colors thereafter, and at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out. lights out. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is illuminated in seven colors, starting from the left X lighting, then the middle X lamp, and the right X lamp, so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the movable body lamp 9d is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 also shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined over a very long time of 600000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on. Data of (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern of color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the attacker lamp 9c over 280 ns each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until 1350 msec is completed, and performs a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of repeating color changes.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data are defined over a very long time of 600000 msec for the lighting target of 320 msec. there is

When the large right-hand hitting promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then controls the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. is referenced multiple times to cause the attacker lamp 9c to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then the grandchild table A11c is referenced over the last 320 msec to turn off the attacker lamp 9c. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamps are illuminated in an arch from left to right, and soon the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps go out in an arch from the left to the right. becomes extinguished. Such a large right hitting promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Also, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, where the light is turned off at the beginning, the color of the predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and the light is turned off after that, the lighting of the attacker lamp 9c is turned on three times. Scenarios are divided into stages, and the same grandchild table A11b is repeatedly referred to for the repetition of the predetermined pattern color in the middle, so that there is no need to prepare data for the entire time from the beginning to the end of lighting for 2000 msec. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25(c4), description will be given of the rendering mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part of the fanfare effect. As shown in FIG. 10-25(c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-25(c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26(c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-27(c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-28(c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp reaches the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c16), the image display device 5 continues to display the character image "RIGHT" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the arrow image directed to the right. As for the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, X in the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also extinguished. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Right shot" superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the board right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right shot!" is displayed superimposed on the right arrow image. As for the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c is also extinguished. Sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R also stops. As a result, the first series of large right-handed promotion performances is completed.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second big right hitting promotion effect starts. At this time, as for the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. It should be noted that, in the second hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds in a manner corresponding to the right hitting promotion effect. As a result, when the transition is made to the jackpot round after the end of the big-right hitting promotion production, the BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) during the big-winning round and the sound in the big-right hitting promotion production do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second hard hitting promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as in the first hard hitting promotion effect. During this time, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of larger characters and graphics than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to hit right in a more emphatic manner than the small right-handed promotion effect. be. Therefore, the player can be urged to hit the right hand in an easy-to-understand manner by executing the large right-hand hitting promotion effect during the fanfare effect.

In addition, in the first big right-handed promotion performance, a sound (for example, queuing sound effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance, thereby effectively affecting the player. While it is possible to encourage hitting to the right, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-hand hitting promoting effect in the second big hitting to the right promotion effect, so that the BGM during the subsequent big win round. can be prevented from interfering with

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion performance, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to gradually appear in stages, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. The effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). For example, the character images appear one by one in the big right hitting promotion effect, but all the character images appear at once in the name image of the big win game state. In addition, as for the size of the character image in the big right hitting promotion effect, the character image in the name image in the big win game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. Thus, after the name image of the big winning game state is displayed to inform the player of the big winning, the player can be informed of the right hitting by the big right hitting promoting performance with emphasis.

The attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and is aimed at when the game ball is shot. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without flashing.

In the following example, an effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R variable probability jackpot, but the other effects are the same as the 5R variable probability jackpot. Also, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning prize effect are not executed, but the other effects are the same as the 5R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished and the second round of the big right-handed promotion effect ends, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27), switching to the big hit round is performed. Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually lowered by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right shot!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. Incidentally, as described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of effect data up to the stage of FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-39(d3) to 10-40(e4) on the basis of the special prize opening open specifying command (A101 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-40 (e4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. In addition, the display of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a kind of effect in image display called "transition". A "transition" is a transition that is inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various methods in video editing such as wipe and overlap.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (also referred to as transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree (for example, 0%) that is lower than the first degree. % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, The next 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds is used to gradually decrease the transparency (transmittance) from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, it takes a predetermined time to change the transparency (transparency). rate) is not fade-in. Note that when changing the opacity (also referred to as opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above % values are reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

“Fade-out” is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second, The transparency (transmittance) is then gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds. On the other hand, as in the method of changing the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparent, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. rate) is not faded out. In addition, when changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), fade-out changes the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency When the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 0%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is gradually increased to 100%. The image is made transparent in stages to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38(d2), the player sees only the white image in the second layer of the screen, which is positioned deeper than the first layer of the screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering to , the background image during the big win round is gradually made opaque to make it easy to see (fade-in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the big win round on the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen.

There is also a technique called "crossfade" as a transition. Cross-fading is, for example, fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. In terms of appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, as described above, the first layer of the screen is faded out and then faded in, so that the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is displayed. is displayed once in the middle of switching from the image in the first period of the ED to the image in the second period of the ED.

In the present embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect displayed in the upper right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. Display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the background image switching display" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player cannot see the image. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player can see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect a little but cannot understand the meaning (promotion of right-handed hitting) indicated by the image. It means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), after the background image during the big win round appears by fading in, as shown in FIG. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 . At the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big winning round is displayed. Furthermore, an image (an arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. In addition, BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the big win round) starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the effect during the round. It should be noted that, as described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-hand hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the effect promoting small right hitting is displayed in the upper right ( arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the 1Rth is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A201 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), between the rounds, the big prize opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An image (an arrow and a character) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A102 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 2Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 10-41(e5) to 10-42(e8), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), during 2R, the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and a text image of "PUSH!!" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to be superimposed on the background image corresponding to the during-round effect. In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestive effect, the V A character image of "Success!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a mode according to the production during the round (such as a V probability variation suggestive production). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the production during the round (such as the V probability variation suggestive production).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the 2nd round is finished, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A202 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), between the rounds, the big prize opening is normally kept closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Succeeded!!” is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting a small right stroke is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 3Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big winning opening is opened and the V announcement effect is executed. Specifically, a character image and a character image of "Grab the V in the next round!" In the upper right part of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right part. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5, together with the character image. A character image of "Catch the V in the next round!" is displayed, and further, an image (arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as V notice performance).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, based on the command from CPU103, the production control CPU 120 executes the production aiming at V between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), between rounds, the effect of aiming at V is executed while the big winning hole is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large), which is the target (place) to be aimed by the player by hitting to the right, is superimposed on the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning slot) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the "Aim for V" effect, it is possible to prompt the player to hit rightward so as to enter the game ball into the V big winning hole by using the image display related to the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A104 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4Rth based on the command from the CPU 104 . 10-44 (e14) and (e15), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIG. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-44 (e14) to FIG. 10-44 (e15) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened, and the "Aim for V" effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim at the V big winning hole by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during the 4R, the "Aim for V" effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for V). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as the effect of aiming for the V).

When a game ball enters the V big winning opening and a V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability variation determining device passing designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU120, the data of each effect of Figure 10-44 (e16) ~ Figure 10-45 (e18), set based on the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-44 (e16) to 10-45 (e18) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, the background image corresponding to the mid-round effect is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the V winning has occurred. V" image is displayed, and an image (an arrow and characters) of a small right hitting promotion effect is subsequently displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (such as the V winning performance). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (such as the V winning effect).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round is finished, the V big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A204 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), between the rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is superimposed on the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, the image (arrow and character) of the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed on the upper right.

When the inter-round ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A105 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the 5Rth round based on the command from the CPU 103 . 10-45 (e19) to FIG. 10-46 (e21), the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect in accordance with the special winning opening open specification command (A105 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-45 (e19) to 10-46 (e21) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during the 5R, the round middle effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect continues to the upper right. (arrow and letter) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round is completed, the normal big winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designation command (A205 command) after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designation command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) is not triggered by the effect control command, but progresses with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image for selecting a stage in the variable probability state after the big win game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending production, the character image and the name image indicating the name of the probability change state (in this example, the character image of “Yume Yume RUSH!!”) are displayed on the image display device 5. displayed in the center. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), during the ending effect, the addiction suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Beware of getting addicted. Pachinko is a game to be enjoyed moderately." Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. It should be noted that, during the winning streak, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) in the jackpot game state is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first win. Also in , such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), a forget-to-take prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from forgetting to take a card such as a prepaid card or membership card related to the game. Furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the end of the ending effect, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), and a symbol variation designation to the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 10-48 (g1) and (g2), the performance control CPU 120 stores the data of each performance in FIGS. (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, if there is a second reserved memory number, the CPU 103 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C2 series command), background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , a pattern variation designation command (8D system command), a display result designation command (8C system command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120, based on the command from the CPU 103, variably displays the decorative design in response to the variation in the second special design, or effects during variation in accordance with the variation in the second special design (for example, , Reach production, notice production, etc.). 10-48 (g3) to FIG. 10-49 (g5), the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect of FIG. 10-48 (g3) to FIG. It is set based on the pattern variation designation command (8D system command), the display result designation command (8C system command), and the variation pattern designation command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-48 (g3) to 10-49 (g5) progresses with the passage of time instead of being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even during the variation of the second special symbol, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of a big hit variation, an image corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win performance. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), the group announcement effect is executed as the announcement effect during the big hit variation. The group notice effect is that objects such as characters appear on the screen of the image display device 5 step by step or all at once to make the visibility of the ready-to-win pattern difficult, and then the object disappears to show the specific pattern. It is a production that makes matching (for example, 777 etc.) appear. Even if a notice effect that makes the visibility of the pattern difficult is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right hitting promotion effect ( arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the effect image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot or the player cannot see the image of the effect to promote the small right shot due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice. The player's visibility of the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the player's ability to see the image of the production, but the player cannot understand the meaning of the image (promotion of right-handed play). It means that the player's visibility is given some influence. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-described phenomenon does not occur and the visibility of the player's visibility of the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is not hindered or reduced, the image of the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is different from the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁Note that the effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, when a big hit (10R probability variable big hit) occurs, the CPU 103 sends a big hit start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. to send. Note that the right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) is not transmitted because the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, the effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) progresses with the passage of time rather than being triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yah! Also, a sound congratulating a big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed to a lighting mode for congratulating a big win. On the upper right of the screen, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-50(h2), after the fanfare effect is started, the image display device 5 displays a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!" , a sound corresponding to the start of the big win is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to correspond to the start of the big win. In addition, in the case of consecutive wins with the special figure 2 hit, since the big right hitting promotion effect has already been executed at the time of the special figure 1 win, the big right hitting promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect ends, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening (A101 command) to the effect control CPU 120 . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the mid-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the mid-round effect in the 1Rth.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the round effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the upper right continues. , an image (arrows and characters) for promoting small right hitting is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIGS. 10-40 to 10-46, various effects such as a V notice effect, a V aiming effect, and a V winning effect are executed during the round, and when the jackpot round ends soon. , ending effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 10-46 and 10-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-48, it is again controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state. In this series of games, on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed, and a right-handed display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the fourth symbol Each of the right-handed indicators 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Before long, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without the occurrence of a jackpot and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120, and the command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hitting display part 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the parts 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player hits to the left again in the normal state.

[Aspect of performance of pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored]
FIG. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored during the fanfare effect due to winning one special figure. 10-51, as shown in FIG. 10-20, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. .

As shown in FIG. 10-51, a state in which an image (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations!") congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24 (c2) ), a state in which only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-28 (c14)), and an arrow image in the large right-handed promotion performance together with the arrow image “Right-handed! !” is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, a character image of "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a large winning opening open designation command (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening open designation. Based on the command (A101 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1). In addition, an image congratulating a big hit (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!"), a name image indicating the name of the big win gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!"). character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed!"

In this way, even if power failure occurs before the large right-hand promotion effect is executed or until the large right-hand promotion effect is completed, the small right-hand promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that. Therefore, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right immediately after the power failure, and it is not possible to enter the game ball into the main prize hole if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player the disadvantage of

FIG. 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 10-52, as shown in FIG. 10-20, assume power interruption 2 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-52, in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added starting from 0 points again, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. It should be noted that the point image is not limited to being displayed at 0pt after recovery from power failure, and the point may not be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??"

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when power is restored during the round after one big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 10-53 is the power interruption 3 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-53, in the state where the image corresponding to the effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-40 (e4)), when power failure occurs, After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A102 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display the effect image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure during two rounds of the jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. 10-54, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 2R, and then power interruption 4 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-54, when an image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestive effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-41 (e7)), when power failure occurs, the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in Fig. 10-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the electricity is restored between the rounds after two rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 10-55 is the power interruption 5 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of (e9) in FIG. 10-42), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A103 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A103 command) to the effect control CPU 120, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), to execute the V notice effect as shown in Fig. 10-42 (e10). can also be configured to

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pachinko game machine in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after three rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. As shown in FIG. 10-21, the power outage shown in FIG. 10-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the round after the 3R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-56, in the state where the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of (e13) in FIG. 10-43), when power failure occurs, the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A104 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 . Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power interruption. Also, since the stored data about the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, after recovery from the power failure, if the CPU 103 is configured to transmit a big win start designation command (A0 series command) in addition to the big winning opening open designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120, performance control. The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103, based on the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening (A103 command) and the command for specifying the start of the jackpot (A0 series command), executes the effect of aiming at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14). It can also be configured as

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as being unable to enter the game ball into the V big winning opening in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can.

FIG. 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the 4 rounds of the big win at the time of winning 1 special figure. 10-57, as shown in FIG. 10-21, it is assumed that the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-57, the state where the image corresponding to the effect of aiming for the V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-44 (e15)), or the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-44 (e16)), when the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the power is turned on to display "Restoring...". is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the image display device 5 is caused to display an effect image during 5R as shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off during the big win round, the small right-hand hitting promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player is at least given right-hand hits immediately after recovery from the power cut. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged such as being unable to enter a game ball into a normal big winning hole in the next round by forgetting to hit to the right. can be done. Furthermore, as in 4R, when power is cut off while the aiming effect for V and the small right-hand promotion effect are being executed, and as shown in FIG. In the case where the power is cut off while the right-handed promotion effect is being executed, both are common to each other, and after the power is restored from the power cut-off, aim for V and the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, while the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed. is minimally performed. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least prompt the player to hit to the right immediately after recovery from the power failure in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 in the case of recovering from power failure between rounds after four rounds of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. The power interruption shown in FIG. 10-58 is the power interruption 8 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-58, when power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-45 (e18)) between the rounds after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening (A105 command) is received, the CPU 120 designates the opening of the large winning opening. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the power failure.

In this way, even if power is cut off between rounds, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent as much as possible from giving the player a disadvantage such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big winning opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the final round of the big win at the time of winning one special figure. 10-59, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during 5R, and then power interruption 9 is assumed when the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIG. 10-59, the state in which the image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 10-46 (e20)), or the state after the end of 5R (FIG. 10 -46 (e21)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the image display device 5 displays a character image of "Restoring..." when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it responds to the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, the image display device 5 is caused to display an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1).

In this way, even if power is cut off during the final round of the big win, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that. It is possible to encourage hitting to the right and to prevent forgetting to hit to the right as much as possible.

FIG. 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when the power is restored during the ending effect at the time of winning one special figure. 10-60, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the power interruption 10 when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored is assumed. .

As shown in FIG. 10-60, the state in which the image for selecting the stage in the probability changing state after the jackpot game state among the ending effects is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-46 (f1)), the character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the variable probability state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-47 (f2)), showing an image corresponding to the immersion suppression notification effect and the result of the game in the jackpot game state. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-47 (f3)), and a forget-to-take prevention image for preventing the player from forgetting to take a card is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (the state of (f4) in FIG. 10-47), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Restoring..." is displayed by turning on the power. is displayed on the image display device 5 .

Here, even during restoration, the image (arrow and characters) of the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right hitting display portion 075F030 of the special LED board 075F020 and the right hitting display portion 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also illuminated by lighting means to prompt right hitting.

After that, if there is a reserved memory number, the effect control CPU 120 sends a reserved memory number designation command (C1 system command, C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command) from the CPU 103 , display result designation command (8C series command) and variation pattern designation command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, reserved storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background designation command (95 series command), pattern variation designation command (8D series command), display result designation command (8C series command), and variation pattern designation command (81 series command), Figure 10-48 (g1) The image display device 5 is caused to display a performance image corresponding to such a variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specified command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored while the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as the decorative pattern and the small pattern) is stopped. .

In this way, even if the power is cut off during the ending, the effect of promoting a small right hit is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so that the player at least hits to the right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible, such as not being able to enter the second start winning port in a probability variable state after a big win game state due to forgetting to hit to the right. be able to.

[Main Effects Obtained by Characteristic Portion 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the characterizing portion 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), and A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
After that, while the first guidance display is ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
After that, while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, aim at V as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13). The part where the image display corresponding to the production is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion production is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued even after the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area becomes the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-44 (e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the second guidance display is continued while the third guidance display is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), aim for V While the image display corresponding to
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect (while the display is being performed), and when the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)) (While the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed), the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after power-on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring..." The part where the character image of and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
After that, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1), (d2 ), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated, while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion performance is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the effect of aiming for V is performed and the image display corresponding to the effect suggesting hitting the small right is continued),
After that, the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, FIG. 10-44 ( As shown in e15), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim for the V effect and the image display corresponding to the suggestive effect of hitting the small right are continued),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16)). While ending the image display corresponding to the aiming effect, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect (while the display is being performed), and when the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57). The part where the character image and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect or a V aim effect by the CPU 120);
a specific area into which the game media flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and graphics (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area Including a third guidance display using display (for example, image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the second guidance display during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
After that, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A101 command), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-38 As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3R ends (for example, a designation command (A203 command) after opening the big winning hole), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-43 As shown in (e13), the part where the image display corresponding to the aim V effect is performed and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a 4R opening command (for example, a command for specifying during the opening of a large winning opening (A104 command), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44 (e15) As shown, the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are continued),
After that, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability variation determination device passage specification command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 10-44 As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the "Aim for the V" effect is finished, while the image display corresponding to the "Short right hit suggesting effect" is continued),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image corresponding to the small right hitting suggestive effect (while the display is being performed), and when the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15)) During the image display corresponding to the aim V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-hand hitting effect, the power failure occurs and the power is recovered from the power failure. The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed but the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." is displayed after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57). The part where the character image and the image of the small right hitting promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. It is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it, and then ending the large right-handed promotion performance while continuing the small right-handed promotion performance as it is. In addition, the effect of aiming for the V to aim at the V big prize mouth is executed from the time when the V big prize mouth is still closed, and by continuing as it is after the V big prize mouth is opened, the V To appeal to a player the importance of aiming at the big winning hole and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, after the V prize is generated and the V big prize opening is closed, the effect of aiming for the V is terminated, thereby preventing unnecessary promotion notification from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-described flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is instructed to always hit right-handed even after the V prize is generated from before the V big prize opening is opened. can be encouraged. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right. Also, when a power failure occurs during the image display corresponding to the large right hitting suggestive effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting suggesting effect and the power is restored from the power failure, it corresponds to the aim V effect. When the power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right hitting effect are being performed and the power is restored, after the power is turned on, the character image of "Restoring ..." and the small Since the image of the right-handed promotion effect is displayed, the player can be urged to continue right-handed in the subsequent game even if power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process for executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120),
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 ( c1) image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen),
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and the Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect and image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
During the period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-39 (e1) to 10-46 (e21) The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect is not performed during the round),
In the special state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the big hit as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49 The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect in the variable state),
The second guidance display is not affected by background image switching display (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the portion where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out),
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect) (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5). The part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by).

Specifically, during execution of the fanfare effect, the player is encouraged to hit right in subsequent games by executing a large right-handed promotion effect and a small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize right-handed promotion. To prevent a player from appealing to a player for excessive hitting to the right by surely recognizing it and continuing the small right-handed promotion performance while ending the large right-handed promotion performance during the subsequent big winning round. can be done. In addition, the player can be urged to always hit right by continuing to execute the small right hitting promotion effect even in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game state. Furthermore, after the occurrence of the big hit, the switching display (fade-out, fade-in, etc.) performed when switching to the big-hit round after the fanfare production is executed does not affect the small right-hand hitting promotion effect, and the big-hit game state is not affected. Since the small right-hand hitting promotion performance is not affected by the image display by the group notice performance performed in the variable probability state or the time-saving state after finishing, the player can always be urged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the part where the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state (Figs. 10-25 to 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among a plurality of times of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. When it becomes, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan big hit with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right hitting promotion effect part that does not output sound in a certain way).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the part where the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state (Figs. 10-25 to 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. In conjunction with this, the frame lamps are lit in an arch from the left side to the right side twice),
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp lights up in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among a plurality of times of guidance light emission (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29), the second time A portion that does not output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion production when the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion production),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, after the start of the big hit round as shown in FIG. The part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guidance means, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp is a large right-handed promotion effect The part that does not light up in a manner according to the condition).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the lighting position of the lamp by the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hitting. can be encouraged to Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right. Second time), when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so the sound during the big win round that is output after the execution of the large right-handed promotion performance is performed. A player can smoothly hear the BGM during the big winning round without being affected by the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting against the BGM. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed hitting effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the part where the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state (Figs. 10-25 to 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guidance means performs the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance display after turning off the light emission means (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the frame lamp is lit in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the display of the image corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means is
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R will be used to promote a large right-handed hit. part that does not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked thereto is not output, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized mode. can be prevented from feeling troublesome. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result A game machine 1),
a shooting means (for example, a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of shooting a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to an operation by a player;
a first flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the left side of the game area) and a second flow-down path (for example, a path passing through the right side of the game area) through which the game medium can flow down in the game area; Among them, guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses image display to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, image display that urges the player to hit to the right) A process of executing a right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guidance means (for example , a process of executing a right-handed suggestion effect by a frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120);
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that outputs sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (Image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in (c1))
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow-down path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, promotion of large right-hand hitting). The production uses an image display of characters and figures that are larger than the small right hitting promotion production),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guidance display means displays the name of the advantageous state that is part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image indicating the name of the big win game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big win game state is shown as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) Before the display of the name image is completed, the part where the image corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is displayed), and the first guide display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state (Figs. 10-25 to 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image display corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect is performed),
The guiding means are
After turning off the light emitting means, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in Figs. The part that lights up the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
Thereafter, in a state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed (for example, variable probability state, time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guide light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan jackpot with a special figure 2, the frame lamp corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect part that does not light up in the mode).

Specifically, after the big win occurs, first, the player is urged to moderately hit to the right by executing a small right hitting promotion effect, and then a name image indicating the name of the big win game state is displayed. A player can be made to recognize that it is controlled to a big win game state. After making the player aware of the start of the jackpot round, the player is notified of right-handed throwing in an emphasized manner by a large right-handed promotion performance, thereby prompting the player to make right-handed throws in subsequent games. can be recognized with certainty. Also, during the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting position of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so it is easier to understand and effective. The player can be urged to hit right. Furthermore, when the frame lamp promotes hitting to the right, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting to the right, so that the player is urged to hit to the right by the sound as well. can be done. In addition, in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive hit occurs with the special figure 2, since the right hand has already been promoted, at the time of the first hit with the special figure 1 Since the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed as in , and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the instruction to the player to hit to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is emphasized more than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-hand hitting promotion effect shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. In addition, characters appear step by step, the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. As a result, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should hit to the right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the guide light emission of a plurality of times,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotional effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second right-handed promotion is output. As for the subsequent right-handed promotion, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. In addition, the sound is not output in conjunction with the promotion of the second and subsequent right strokes. In other words, the sound data for promoting the right-handed stroke includes only the sound data associated with the first right-handed promotion. As a result, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right hitting against the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right hitting promoting performance. can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission in conjunction with the first guidance light emission among the plurality of guidance light emission,
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the midway guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission,
The corresponding sound is not output when the last guidance light emission is performed among the guidance light emission for a plurality of times.

Specifically, among a plurality of right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps, sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, and then the right-handed promotion effects are output. Sounds corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion performance is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are interlocked with the first and second right-handed promotions based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. The sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of the third right stroke, and the sound is not output. In other words, the sound data for right-handed promotion effect includes only sound data associated with each of the first and second right-handed promotions. It should be noted that the sound data includes only sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to promoting right-handed hitting for one time. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data interlocked with promoting right-handed hitting twice. . Thus, the BGM during the big winning round is smoothly delivered to the player without being affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting to the BGM during the big winning round output after the execution of the large right-hand hitting promotion performance. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, emits the guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c3)). As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner according to the large right hitting promotion effect).

Specifically, after all lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, so that the player is urged to hit right in an easy-to-understand and effective manner. can be done.

(9) the light emitting means emits guidance light in conjunction with the first guidance display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 10-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance light emission, and a child table (for example, , child tables shown in FIGS. 10-35) and the corresponding grandchild tables (for example, child tables shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamps 9 including the frame lamps refer to the parent table to specify the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, and refer to the child table to select the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined. Lighting/blinking/extinguishing is performed by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Of the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit guidance light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left board lamp 075F009E are turned off without being used in the big right hitting promotion effect, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guiding means performs the guiding light emission by sequentially moving the light emitting locations of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 10-25 to 10- 33, the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, thereby executing a large right-handed promotion effect. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to hit to the right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guiding means emits the guiding light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes a large right-hand hitting promotion effect while lighting in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to hit right.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as switching display of the background image performed in relation to the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fading in and fading out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(d1) to 10-39(d4), the effect to promote hitting a small right is to switch the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big win round. It continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the jackpot round by switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue hitting to the right.

(14) The second guidance display is not affected by the display in the advance notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 10 -49 (g5), the portion where the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), the small right hitting promotion effect influences the display in the notice effect suggesting that a big hit will occur in the probability variable state after the end of the big win advantageous state. continue without As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right hitting promotion effect will continue to be displayed without impeding visibility. The player can be urged to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2)). Thus, in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, a mode according to the large right hitting promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the first hit. , and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the promotion of hitting to the right in a manner that is frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the light before the execution of the large right-handed promotion effect)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25(c3), after all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , not all lamps are turned off, and some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) that lights up first in the big right hitting promotion effect may be lit. By doing so, it is possible to show well the connection when the frame lamps are subsequently turned on in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), as a switching display during the big hit round, fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round Although the execution of switching display of the background image has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a presentation effect such as a white-out inserting a pure white screen or a blackout inserting a pitch-black screen between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round may be used.

Also, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (music) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be switched.

Further, as the switching display during the big win round, a mode selection screen for selecting the performance mode may be displayed, and the background image may be switched to the mode corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In any case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big winning round, it is sufficient that the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the effect image in the probability variable state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), as the display of the effect image in the probability changing state after the big hit game ball state, the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the variable probability state after the state of the jackpot game ball, the effect of inserting a pure white screen during the ready-to-win effect or the effect of inserting a black screen may be used. It may be possible to use the effect of pseudo continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or the visibility of the decorative pattern is difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may use the production effect to make it do. In any case, even if a special effect display is performed in the variable probability state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect should be unaffected.

(About aiming for V)
In this embodiment, as the specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V big winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified. As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using the image display related to the specific area, is not limited to pointing to the V big prize opening itself, but also pointing to the vicinity of the V big prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a path leading to the V big prize winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V big winning opening located upstream of the V big winning opening.

(Regarding the promotion of hitting the right hand)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-25(c4) to 10-31(c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the character image "Right shot!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right hitting promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. may consist of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About favorable conditions)
In the present embodiment, the period shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. 10-21 ) was exemplified, but it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, the period shown in FIGS. period until t16). In addition, the fanfare effect and the big right hitting promotion effect may be executed during a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the symbol for the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of the first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit with one special figure, a sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and a frame lamp is in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production. However, it is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special figure, the mode of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be varied. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the big hit in the special figure 1 is a variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion production. You may output a sound in a form. In addition, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion production. may not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chan per special figure 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive chan per special figure 2, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light up in a mode corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner corresponding to the hard hitting to the right promotion effect.

In addition, according to the type of consecutive chan per special figure 2, the aspect of the large right hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, when the jackpot in the special figure 1 hit is the normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner corresponding to the large right hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the hit of the hit in the special figure 2 is a probability variable hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the promotion of hitting the right side, and the speakers 8L, 8R to the promotion of hitting the right side. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, when the consecutive wins in the special figure 2 hits are normal jackpots, the frame lamps are not lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion performance, and the loudspeakers 8L and 8R correspond to the large right-handed promotion performance. You can choose not to output sound with . If the consecutive chan per special figure 2 is a hit, unlike the first hit per special figure 1, a special mode (such as gold or seven colors) according to the frame lamp is a large right-handed promotion production. ), or a sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner corresponding to the promotion effect of hitting to the right. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right hitting promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit with the special figure 1. .

(About the third guide display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display related to the specific area, the image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round of the probability variable jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guide display, in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, an image is displayed to urge the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second start winning hole, or a variable winning ball is displayed. Displaying an image prompting the player to fire a game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sends from the CPU 103 a pending memory number designation command (C2 system command), a background designation command (95 system command), a symbol variation designation command (8D system command), a display result Based on the receipt of the specified command (8C system command) and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command), along with the arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), "Aim! ” may be displayed on the image display device 5 . Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right hitting promotion effect should be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost pattern)
In each characteristic portion and modification described above, for the transition to the time saving state (high base state), the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 075F007A always operate via the big hit state and the small hit state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device You may make it transfer to a time saving state (high base state), without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the time saving pattern described above, these time saving patterns may be part of the losing pattern or may be part of the small winning pattern.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern or the big hit pattern. A lottery random number, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for judging a big win lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery, or the like may be used for the lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with symbols displayed as other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even when using a dedicated random number or when using another random number, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a special random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small hit pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving design may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the time-saving design lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning design uses the time-saving design together, the variable display number of the time-saving state (time-saving number of times) does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area passes. to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when using a big hit pattern random number for lottery of time-saving patterns, it is specified. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of shortening of working hours differs according to the shortening of working hours pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the shortening of working hours pattern between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.例文帳に追加

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the jackpot patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery for the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

Further, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit (so-called specified number of times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high probability low base state at the opening of the game hall , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F, in order to control the game state to the time saving state, it was always via the jackpot game state, so to encourage the player to hit right in the time saving state. It is possible to perform the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance during the fanfare performance executed when the big hit occurs. However, if the above-described losing pattern is used as a time saving pattern, the game state is controlled to a time saving state without going through the big hit game state. In the period from when the pattern is displayed to when it is controlled to the time saving state, it is necessary to secure time for executing the large right hitting promotion performance and the small right hitting promotion performance. Therefore, the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect may be executed by the method described below.

For example, if the pattern confirmation time until the fluctuation of the losing pattern that is not the time saving pattern stops is set to 0.5 seconds, the pattern fixing time until the losing pattern that is the time saving pattern stops is set to 30 seconds longer than that. , You may perform the time-saving fanfare production which alert|reports the start of control of a time-saving state in the meantime. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 is different from the display result specification command indicating normal loss variation without time saving as a command for specifying loss, and time saving is given. A display result specifying command indicating is prepared, and depending on whether or not the time saving pattern is a loss variation, both commands may be used properly and an effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol determination time to 0.5 seconds when a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation is received, and the symbol determination time when a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation is received. should be set to 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time saving state (for example, "time saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the design confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. Such a part of the time-saving fanfare effect can correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 10-24(c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1), before the name image (“time saving RUSH”) by this time saving fanfare production is displayed, an image that congratulates the time saving state (for example, “O Happy!” character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, sounds congratulating the time saving state are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and lighting congratulates the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to change the mode. In addition, as a small right hitting promotion effect, a small right hitting promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a graphic (an arrow pointing to the right) and characters (characters of "right hitting") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5, A right-handed hitting sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that prompts right-handed hitting. It should be noted that the image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display section 075F030 and right-handed display section 075F055 start and end at the same timing. That is, both are designed to encourage the player to hit right over the same period of time.

After that, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2), while the name image (“time saving RUSH”) by the time saving fanfare production is displayed, the small right hitting promotion effect is continuously executed, and then FIG. 10-25 (c3) Once the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the same manner as in the example shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. You may perform a performance. During this time, the small right hitting promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right hitting promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to the time saving state similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 10-48 to 10-50, and the small right hitting promotion effect may be continued.

In this way, even if it is controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, by securing more pattern confirmation time than the pattern confirmation time in the lost pattern that is not the time saving pattern, the design confirmation time is large. A hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect can be executed.

In addition, in the case of being controlled to the time saving state triggered by the lost pattern, as described above, not only those that execute the large right hitting promotion effect and the small right hitting promotion effect using the pattern fixed time as described above, but the loss of the time saving grant If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (fluctuation) of the game whose pattern has been confirmed, in the next game (fluctuation), the short-time fanfare production is executed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small right A hitting promotion effect may be executed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, instead of performing a production that makes you expect a hit such as a reach production or a notice production, a time-saving fanfare production will be performed instead. Along with the execution, a large right hitting promotion effect and a small right hitting promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (fluctuation) after the game in which the losing pattern is determined is a big hit, then the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed, so the time saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost pattern of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare production is executed with the pattern not changed, and the large right hitting promotion production and small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the CPU 103 does not transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120 in order to prevent the performance of the customer waiting demonstration from being executed and hindering the time saving fanfare performance. . Alternatively, even if a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

A plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo consecutive patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display the display results, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed,
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect) (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5). The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect without being affected by
moreover,
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1 After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is rendered invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 Also, the part where the concentration line is continuously displayed) gaming machine is exemplified.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that a temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment due to the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
Guidance display is provided to urge the player to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area, using an image display. and a guidance display means for performing
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. performing a second guidance display, performing the first guidance display after completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state, and continuing the second guidance display;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is continued while the first guidance display is terminated;
Continuing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed,
The second guide display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect) (for example, the image display by the group forewarning effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5). The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right hitting promotion effect without being affected by
moreover,
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the concentration line is continuously displayed), and the game machine.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment about the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
That is, in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the instruction to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction is emphasized by the first guide display and the second guide display, and then the first guide display is displayed. By taking over the second guide display without taking over and instructing to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction, the instruction is not overemphasized so as not to make the player feel annoyed, and the second guide display is performed first. to discreetly instruct the game ball to be shot in a predetermined direction, then recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after recognizing it, firmly instruct the game ball to be shot in the predetermined direction by the first guidance display. In addition, even if the specific effect identification information or the special identification information does not temporarily stop, the effect display will continue to be displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing, so the reverberation of the effect display suggests The performance can strongly impress the player, and the discouragement of the player can be alleviated more than in the case of ending the effect display immediately after the predetermined timing. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine which, when installed in a game arcade, makes it easy for the player to understand the instruction of the direction in which the game ball is to be shot in an advantageous state, thereby easily enhancing the attraction of the presentation.

Further, even if the visibility is lowered when the suggestive effect is executed, it is preferable to continue to display the guide display without lowering the visibility. By doing so, instructions can be given to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, a plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo consecutive symbols) are variably displayed and displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of deriving and displaying a result and controlling it to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1 After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is rendered invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 Also, the part where the concentration line is continuously displayed), and the game machine.

moreover,
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the concentration line is continuously displayed), and the game machine. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Other form examples)

FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 11(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 11 (A).

As shown in FIG. 11 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 11 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the previous set value 6, with 65317 as the reference value of the loss with time reduction (reference value with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 13, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S90175 described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic portion 193SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic portion 193SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 193SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The game machine of form 1 is
A plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo consecutive patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display the display results, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1 After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is rendered invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 also the part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of form 2 is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of form 3 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggestive effect execution means is configured to temporarily stop the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in the case of temporary stop. moving the effect display toward the position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-48 as modification 193SG-1, the part where the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5),
The game machine according to form 1 or 2, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be identified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped.

The game machine of form 4 is
The effect display has higher transparency after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. Before the switching timing, the saturated lines are displayed with the density D2, and after the display image data switching timing, the saturated lines are displayed with the density D1. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the switching timing of the image data),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, characterized by:
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by increasing the transparency of the effect display after the predetermined timing when the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is temporarily stopped. By making the player aware of this fact and increasing attention to the background image that is easy to see through the effect display, the game against the fact that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) did not temporarily stop It can ease a person's frustration.

The game machine of form 5 is
The suggestive effect execution means places the effect display at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, Any effect identification information (or effect identification information) different from the specific effect identification information is erased before it is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. , in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, the concentration line is hidden before the decorative patterns of numbers other than "1", which is a combination of big hits, or "1", which is a combination of losers, stop. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 4, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for the temporary stop.

The game machine of form 6 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) to 14-35 (H) 2, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern is cracked and explodes),
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, at a effect position (for example, the first effect position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) An operable movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 5, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to further impress the player that the game has been temporarily stopped by the action of the movable body and the deformation of the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The game machine of form 7 is
The movable body is
The area overlapping the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is smaller than that of the first action (for example, moving from the retreat position shown in FIG. 14-2 to the first effect position) and the first action. It is possible to perform a second action (for example, moving from the retracted position to the second effect position shown in FIG. 14-2),
In the notification effect, the first action is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (F), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect. ),
The gaming machine according to mode 6, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to impress the player that the game has been temporarily stopped while preventing the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) from becoming difficult to see due to the movable body.

The game machine of form 8 is
The movable body has a light-emitting part capable of emitting light (for example, the second movable body LED193SG034),
In the first operation, the light emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in Modification 193SG-2, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped during the temporary stop notification effect. The part that emits light in the color of the concentration line displayed in the suggestive effect),
The gaming machine according to mode 7, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the light-emitting section emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display, the presentation effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 9 is
The first action of the movable body ends before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, FIGS. 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G) 2, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position before the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to mode 7 or mode 8, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is erased.

The game machine of form 10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) to 14-35 (H) 2, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern is cracked and explodes),
After the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, display of “x2”, “x3”, “x4”, etc.) suggesting that the N+1th variable display will be executed. Display means corresponding to a specific effect that can be displayed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13),
a movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to an effect position (for example, a first effect position) that overlaps at least part of the specific effect corresponding display displayed by the specific effect corresponding display means;
comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 9, characterized by:
According to this feature, the action of the movable body can increase attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light-emitting part capable of emitting light (for example, the second movable body LED193SG034),
The light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as the first variable display start count notification effect, blue when displaying "x2" and displaying "x3") is green, and when displaying "x 4", the second movable body LED 193SG034 is illuminated in red),
The gaming machine according to mode 10, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a mode corresponding to the display corresponding to the different variable display, it is possible to encourage attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, thereby improving the effect of the effect.

The game machine of form 12 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestive effect is executed, the special effect (for example, the part where the temporary stop suggestive image is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5) (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13),
with
When the suggestive effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestive effect is displayed prior to the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestive effect (for example, instead of the normal decorative pattern, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed. A portion that is moved and displayed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5),
The special effect executing means, as the special effect, a first effect period (for example, FIG. 14- 33, the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggesting effect) and the predetermined position because the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) did not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing. (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect), and the effect related to the transition can be executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 14-33, 14-35, and 14-44, the central portion of the image display device 5 displays a temporary stop suggesting image while displaying a concentration line),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 11, characterized by:
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestive effect becomes easy, and the special effect makes the transition to the second effect period unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop. You can prevent it from getting lost.

The game machine of form 13 is
The special effect executing means, as the special effect, adds the second effect at a position different from the predetermined position to the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position. It is possible to execute an effect that overlaps and displays the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a translucent state at a position corresponding to the period (for example, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 is displayed),
The gaming machine according to mode 12, characterized by:
According to this feature, the transition to the second presentation period can be made more natural.

The game machine of form 14 is
The image display means is capable of synthesizing and displaying displays drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, image data 1, image data 2, image Data 3 and data drawn as image data 4 are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 5),
A drawing layer on which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from a drawing layer on which the effect display of the suggestive effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 14-3 , a temporary stop suggesting image is drawn as image data 1, a decoration pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a concentration line is drawn as image data 4),
The gaming machine according to mode 12 or 13, characterized by:
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect can be drawn separately from the effect display of the suggestive effect. ) and the degree of freedom of special effects can be increased.

The game machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect that the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed and then moved and erased (for example, FIG. 14-35 (G ) to Figures 14-35(H), 14-36(I), and 14-36(J), after the simulated consecutive symbols are cracked and exploded, they are displayed moving toward the player side. hidden part),
After the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased, a display corresponding to a specific effect (for example, "x2", "x3", " × 4” etc.) can be displayed) (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13) is further provided,
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is hidden after moving toward the player side),
The effect identification information in the N+1th variable display becomes visible after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased and before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased (for example, FIG. As shown in 14-37(O), when 'x2', 'x3', 'x4', etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, left and right decoration patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 14, characterized by:
According to this feature, the effect of the notification effect and the display corresponding to the specific effect can be enhanced, and since the effect identification information can be visually recognized before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased, the variable display can be restarted. can be easily recognized by the player.

The game machine of form 16 is
A notice effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part),
The advance notice effect executing means limits the execution of the notice effect when the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased (for example, as shown in Modified Example 193SG-3, the first variable display start count notification effect is " When the display of "x2", "x3", and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the part that limits the execution of the notice effect),
The gaming machine according to mode 15, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to easily recognize that the variable display is restarted due to the execution of the advance notice effect.

The game machine of form 17 is
Both the movement of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific effect corresponding display are movements toward the direction of the player who is playing the game (for example, the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and the game a portion where the display is moved toward the player side, and a portion where the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is moved and displayed toward the player side),
The gaming machine according to mode 15 or mode 16, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the impression given to the player and improve the performance effect.

The game machine of form 18 is
A special effect that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed (for example, the blast shown in modification 193SG-4 a portion that displays a visibility-impairing image such as an image) (for example, a portion that the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13);
The specific effect executing means makes the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display visible after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made invisible by the special effect (for example, modification 193SG -4, a portion that executes re-variable display after hiding the visibility-impairing image),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 17, characterized by:
According to this feature, before the display including the effect identification information corresponding to the restart of the variable display is started, a special effect is executed in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) becomes difficult to see. It is possible to make it easy to understand that the variable display is restarted.

The game machine of form 19 is
an image display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying the variable display of the effect identification information and the effect display of each effect;
A plate member provided on the player side of the image display means and having transparency so that the display of the image display means can be visually recognized by the player, and the special image can be displayed by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface. a light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in Modification 193SG-4);
with
In the special effect, the special effect executing means makes the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means invisible by displaying the special image on the light guide plate. (For example, as shown in Modification 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate so that the player can see the pseudo consecutive symbols displayed on the image display device 5. part that is difficult to see),
The gaming machine according to mode 18, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, the player's impression can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special presentation can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 20 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is Different from the moving speed of the effect identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is V1, The part where the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the data switching timing is V3),
19. The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 19, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is before or after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop.

The game machine of form 21 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined position of the temporary stop before the predetermined timing is The specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) passing through the predetermined position after the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in modification 193SG-5, a pseudo Even if the continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern once starts moving downward of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the center of the image display device 5 after once passing through the center of the image display device 5 are set. The part that changes the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern when returning to the part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 20, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the movement is before passing the predetermined position or the movement back after passing.

The game machine of form 22 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, the suggestive effect execution means regulates the display of the effect display (for example, modification 193SG As shown in -5, when the pseudo continuous pattern once returns to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5, the part where the concentration line is not displayed again),
The gaming machine according to mode 21, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement is returning after passing by.

The game machine of form 23 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped is the specified speed after the temporary stop. Different from the movement speed at which the effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-34, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive patterns before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive patterns is However, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols is V2),
19. The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 19, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The game machine of form 24 is
The movement direction of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the movement direction of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move downward, while the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop move toward the player side (front side). the part that moves with the
The gaming machine according to mode 23, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the vehicle is moving after the temporary stop, and to prevent misrecognition of the movement.

FIG. 14-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in the characteristic portion 193SG. As shown in FIG. 14-1, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 has a drive motor (not shown), and is operable under control of the drive motor by the effect control CPU 120 . Further, a second movable body LED 193SG034 for causing the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light is built in the second movable body 193SG033. In addition, the second movable body LED193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14 .

As shown in FIG. 14-2(A), the second movable body 193SG033 at the time of non-operation is arranged at a lower position (retracted position) of the image display device 5 between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. At the retracted position, most of the second movable body 193SG033 is hidden by the game board 2, so that it is difficult for the player to see the second movable body 193SG033.

The second movable body 193SG033 in the present characteristic portion 193SG is shown in FIG. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Of these, when the temporary stop notification effect is executed and when the first variable display start count notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-2(B). While moving (operating) to the first effect position, which is the front position, when executing the big hit notification in the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (C), the second movable body 193SG003 It moves (moves) from the retracted position to the second effect position which is the front position of the image display device 5 and which is above the first effect position.

Although not shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first effect position or the second effect position returns to the retracted position again from the first effect position or the second effect position after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It's becoming

Furthermore, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect, so that a part of the pseudo continuous symbol overlaps with the pseudo continuous symbol when viewed from the front. (See Figure 14-35 (F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second effect position is limited only to the execution of the big hit notification during the super ready-to-win effect. That is, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first effect position is also an action in which the area overlapping the pseudo consecutive symbols is larger than that of the movement from the retracted position to the second effect position.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3(A) to 14-3(D) and FIGS. 14-4(A) to 14-4(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, , an image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. FIG. Among them, FIG. 14-3 shows the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary-stop suggesting effect (see FIG. 14-35) in the characteristic portion 193SG, and FIG. This is the image data when it did not stop.

As shown in FIG. 14-3(A), the image data 1 displays a pseudo-continuous symbol (this feature) in the central portion (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C) of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a temporary stop suggesting image that suggests stopping (temporary stopping).

The pseudo-continuous symbol in the characteristic portion 193SG is a special symbol that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during a temporary stop suggesting effect or a temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative symbol. It is a pattern in which a re-variable display (pseudo continuous effect) of the decoration pattern is executed by temporarily stopping the pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is a symbol different from the decorative symbol, and is displayed on the image display device 5 only during a temporary stop suggesting effect or a temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later. may be

Further, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, a form in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are a part of the decorative symbols and are displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggesting effect or the temporary stop notification effect is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol that is displayed as a part of the variable display together with the normal ornamental symbol during the temporary stop suggesting effect or the temporary stop notifying effect.

Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is a pattern different from the decoration pattern, the normal decoration pattern (characteristic part "1" to "9" number patterns) is temporarily stopped at the central portion of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol to a pseudo-continuous symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3(B) and 14-4(A), the image data 2 shows the above-described pseudo consecutive symbols directed downward from the top of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. In addition to being data drawn to display the movement display of , immediately after the temporary stop suggesting effect is completed without the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping, instead of the pseudo consecutive symbols, from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal ornamental patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 193SG) toward the .

In the image data 2, when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed, the ornamental symbols are displayed in the “left” and “right” ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the temporary stop suggesting effect is not executed. It is also the image data for displaying the variable display of the decorative design in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R at the time of execution.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(B), the image data 3 is a simulated image from the center of the image display device 5 toward the lower side immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the simulated continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3(C) and 14-4(C), the image data 4 is distributed from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decoration pattern display). This data is drawn to display a saturated line toward the area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

In addition to the image data 1 to image data 4, the image data in the characteristic portion 193SG includes image data 5 drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5, although not shown. . The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4 . That is, in the characteristic portion 193SG, among the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer data.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. The image based on the image data 1 (temporary stop suggesting image) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 4. As shown in FIG. 14-4(D), the image based on the image data 3 (from the center of the pseudo-continuous symbol to The image based on the image data 4 (concentrated line) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display toward the bottom), and the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the top to the bottom of the decorative pattern) is displayed as the image data. The image based on the image data 3 and the image based on the image data 4 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, the transmittance of the concentrated line in this characteristic portion 193SG is set to be high (for example, 50%). For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 14-3(C) and 14-4(D), during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the player can see the decorative symbols, the pseudo consecutive symbols, and the temporary stop suggestion through the concentration line. The image is visible.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 193SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) determines whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) changes the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 14-33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped. The image data (FIG. 14-3) in which the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped is switched to the image data (FIG. 14-4) in which the pseudo-continuous symbols shown in FIG. 14-4 are not temporarily stopped.

FIG. 14-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characterizing portion 193SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 14-5(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-5(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also called variable display result) is "loss" or "big win" or "minor win". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-5(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" as a result of judgment at the time of winning, the judgment result of the big hit type (probable variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability) and whether it will be a small hit. is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

It should be noted that the commands shown in FIG. 14-5(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be used instead of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 14-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-6, in this characteristic portion 193SG, on the main board 11 side, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 14-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 193SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 193SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 14-7 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 193SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 193SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 14-8(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 193SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 193SG will be described with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. "Variable probability big hit C" to shift, and "non-variable big hit" to shift to the low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the big-hit game based on the "probability-variable big-hit C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning-ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated, and a special It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic portion 193SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

That is, in this characteristic portion 193SG, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 14-9) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. Since it is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 193SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 14-9 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 193SG. In this characteristic portion 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although two types of normal reach variation patterns are provided in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, or one normal reach variation pattern may be provided. Only the type may be used. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 193SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 193SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, as for the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG, there are a variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous effects are performed twice during variable display, and a variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous effects are performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, since the variable display result is set in order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes "big hit", in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 193SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from these random values for determining the type of variation pattern The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 14-10 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG. In this characteristic part 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-10, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) Variation pattern), PB1-2 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 1 time big hit variation pattern), PB1-3 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 2 times big hit variation pattern), PB1-4 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 3 times big hit variation pattern) ).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 14-10, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to be the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. It's becoming Furthermore, focusing on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effects are executed, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, more pseudo consecutive effects are performed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probable variable jackpot. easier to implement. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variable big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss variation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss) and PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 193SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display is performed more frequently by the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

The RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage part stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores production control data as shown in FIG. Area 193SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 14-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 193SG191, a production control timer setting unit 193SG192, a production control counter setting unit 193SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 193SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores the data indicating the timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 193SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the start-up winning command buffer 193SG194A of the characterizing portion 193SG, whether or not the display pattern has not been determined in accordance with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 11). Or, in other words, due to the occurrence of a new start winning prize, the display pattern determination is undecided due to the newly stored starting entrance winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command. A display undecided flag indicating a, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory Each corresponding to A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

In addition, in the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning of this characteristic part 193SG, a storage area so that the effect limit flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured for each storage area (entry). It should be noted that the effect limit flag means that in the command analysis process (Fig. 14-18), the start winning occurred at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, but the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, the number of reserved memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading notice effect when the notification command is not received within a first reserved storage number notification waiting time or a second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

14-11(B), each time the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start prize determination process of the characterizing section 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIGS. 14-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 193SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be possible to specify the number of the first special figure reservation memory. At step 193SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 193SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 193 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 193SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 193SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 193 SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 193 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 193 SGS109 to extract numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 193SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 193SGS111, a winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 193SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 14-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 193SGS112 of FIG. 14-13 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 193SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 5, FIGS. 14-15), which will be described later, determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 193SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 14-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit etc., Pachinko game machine 1 (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 193SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 193SGS109 in FIG. 14-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 193SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 193SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-7 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 193SGS109 in FIG. 14-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 193 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command according to the result (step 193SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS127), and proceed to step 193SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designated command (step 193SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 193 SGS 129). If the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and variation pattern determination table D for loss, this characteristic unit 193SG includes a variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the number of pending memories is 3. , A deviation variation pattern determination table C that is used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance. , For example, 498 (approximately 50%) determination values from 0 to 497 out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern are assigned, and the deviation variation pattern In the determination table B, 598 (about 60%) determination values from 0 to 597 out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern are assigned. In the fluctuation pattern determination table C, 698 (approximately 70%) judgment values from 0 to 697 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns in the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for deviation, 100 (about 10%) judgment values from 898 to 997 out of the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the super reach fluctuation pattern is assigned.

Therefore, in step 193SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

Further, when it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that it will be a big hit during the variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 14-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 193 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 193 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (Step 193 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS135), and step Go to 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193 SGS 134b; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS136), go to step 193SGS138.

When the judged jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193 SGS134b; N), that is, when the judged jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot C, a special winning variation pattern judgment table is selected and set. (step 193SGS137) and proceeds to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (step 193SGS138). In this characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 193SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 14-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 14-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 193SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 193SGS141; N), the second special figure pending storage unit holds data stored corresponding to the holding number "1" As such, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 193 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value and updating the count value, subtract 1 from the second special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 193SGS144), it moves to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS145). . The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads out the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. Thus, the processing of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 193SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 193 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value and updating it, etc., subtract 1 from the 1st special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward by one entry (step 193SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 193SGS148), it moves to step 193SGS149.

In step 193 SGS149, the table used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, is a "jackpot" or a "loss" is used as a special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. 14-7. Select and set Table 1. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss" (step 193SGS150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off and the low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values corresponding to the game state at that time (high probability, low probability) are assigned to "jackpot". , in the process of step 193 SGS150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value) special figure display result is determined to be a ``big hit'', when the game state is a high-probability state, it is determined (determined) as a ``big hit'' with a higher probability than when it is a low-probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 193SGS150a (step 193SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit turns on the jackpot flag (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 193 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193 SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability variable B" corresponding to B, it is set to "2", and if it is "probability variable C" corresponding to probability variable big hit C, it is set to "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "jackpot" at step 193SGS150a (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is to be a "small hit" (step 193SGS150c). In addition, in step 193SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. , When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 193SGS150c (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 193SGS150c (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193 SGS156, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is turned on) as a result of the prior determination, whether to control to the small hit game state (whether the small hit flag is turned on) Determined special symbols are set according to the result of prior determination of (whether or not the game is played) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 193SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 193SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 193SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure in step 193SGS145 is "0" (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 193SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIGS. 14-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "variable probability big hit C" (step 193 SGS163), and if it is not "variable probability big hit C", that is, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non- In the case of either "probability variable jackpot" (step 193 SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" or "probability variable jackpot B". , the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "variable probability jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the judgment in step 193SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further judged whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS167), and proceed to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit, the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state. In step 193, SGS168, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed. Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 193 (SGS 169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 193 SGS168; N), for example provided in the game control counter setting unit, the storage value of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure By reading, etc., specify the number of pending storage of the fluctuation special figure, and determine whether the specified number of holding storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193 SGS170; N), the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss is used as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 193 SGS172; Y), the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for loss is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. (Step 193SGS173).

In addition, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 193 SGS172; N), the variation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for failure as a table used for determining .

After executing any one of the processes of step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, for example, the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer or the like Based on the numerical data indicating, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern determination table for the special hit, or the variation pattern determination table for the loss A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS175).

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 193SGS175. That is, the process of step 193 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decoration pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 193SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start any one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 193SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands to be used at the start of fluctuation of special symbols (step 193SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance, the game control buffer setting unit is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the required time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 193SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. The commands may be transmitted in the order of the designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory count notification command, or the second reserved memory count notification command.

FIGS. 14-16 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S112 to end the variation of the special symbols, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B The stop symbol is stopped and displayed (step 193SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the small hit flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step 193SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 193 SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 193SGS190b). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, two times) is set in the counter for the number of opening times of the big winning opening (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is turned on (step 193 SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns it off (step 193 SGS 184), hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C ), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) is performed (step 193 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). In addition, the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a probability variable jackpot C) is set in the big winning opening opening counter. (Step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), at step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 193 SGS190; N), that is, if it is a high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 193 SGS 191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 193SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag to turn off (step 193SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time saving flag After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low probability/low base) (step 193SGS195), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIGS. 14-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (Step 193SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for displaying the jackpot end display on the image display device 5. is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not the non-variable probability jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), after turning on the variable probability flag (step 193SGS210), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the variable probability flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting "0" to the time saving frequency counter (step 193SGS209), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), by executing steps 193SGS211 and 193SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, go to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag that are turned on (step 193 SGS215), the value of the special process flag is changed to a special It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIGS. 14-18 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 14-18, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set (set) at step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 described later has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237) If the first or second reserved storage number notification wait time has not elapsed (Step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first or second reserved memory count notification waiting time has passed, that is, the first reserved memory count notification command or the second reserved memory count notification command or the second When the pending storage number notification command is not received (step 193SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the entry for which the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command is not stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 193 SGS222). And, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set to the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 Just do it.

When the received command is not the first start winning designation command at step 193SGS222 (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting winning designation command (step 193SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

In step 193SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, when it is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). Then, when it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the waiting time for notification of the second reserved storage number is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). .

After executing either of the processing of step 193SGS229 and step 193SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the production restriction flag is turned on (step 193 SGS232).

If the command received at step 193SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), or if the command received at step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 After executing any of the processes, the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning.

If the received command in step 193SGS230 is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has passed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time has passed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second reserved memory count notification waiting time has passed, that is, the first reserved memory count notification command or the second reserved memory count notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (step 193 SGS235; Y), the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the effect limit flag of the corresponding entry that has not been stored is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to step 193SGS221.

14-19 are part of a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process processing. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect in the pre-reading notice setting process and determines the effect pattern of the pre-reading notice effect (the display pattern of the pending memory display) (S161), Next, a pending display update process for updating the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG005D and the second pending memory display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to the display according to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIG. 14-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 14-20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not variable display is being executed may be determined by whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 1-3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), it is during the execution period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. (Step 193SGS240b). Note that the first variable display start count notification effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in FIGS. After that, it is an effect for notifying the number of times the variable display of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display is started during one variable display. Further, in step 193 SGS240a, it is possible to determine whether or not the execution period of the first variable display start times notification effect is being executed by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), step Proceeding to 193SGS 250 sets the pending display flag to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, during the execution period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed.

At step 193SGS241, the effect control CPU 120 checks the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new stored command at the time of starting winning by determining whether or not there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (set to "1") (step 193SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 193SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 193SGS242; Y) , Whether the design designation command of the entry is the 4th design designation or the 6th design designation command, that is, it is determined whether the design designation command is a design designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit ( Step 193 SGS 243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a variable probability big hit C or a small hit (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is changed. , the pending display flag is set. In other words, the pre-reading announcement effect is not executed with respect to the holding memory for the probability variable big win C or the small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first design designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating loss. (Step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either of probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot B, or non-probability variation jackpot) (step 193 SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 193SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, etc. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 14-21(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21(A), the determination ratio of the presence/absence of pre-reading notice effects and the display pattern (notice type) is changed according to the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. .

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display. Displayed in area 193SG5U.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit other than the probability variable jackpot C, there is no case where the pre-reading notice effect is decided not to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (announcement type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A", the ratio of display pattern β to be determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by display pattern α. is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" or "non-probability variable jackpot", the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the variable probability big win A, and the player's expectation for the variable probability big win A can be increased.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always determining the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in a white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C. Even in cases other than "jackpot", it may be possible to determine non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

Also, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 193SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 193 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, etc., and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 193 SGS247. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the hourly pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 193 SGS248).

In step 193 SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 14-21(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21 (B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview effect and the display pattern (notice type) is set according to the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 193SGS247. making it different.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area. 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5D. It is displayed in the memory display area 193SG5U. Incidentally, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a round shape (○) which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 14-21 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", the rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher. In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-21(A), when the variable display result is "big win", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect). The rate at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the variation pattern categories when the variable display result is "loss". is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable A)", when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" than , especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit A". Since the ratio of , the expectation of the player can be increased.

After execution of step 193SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 193SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 193SGS249).

After step 193SGS245 is executed or if execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending storage display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

Further, in step 193SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 193SGS250), go to step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). Thereafter, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the receive command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is displayed according to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A after the shift. The pending display in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D and the second pending storage display area 193SG5U provided in the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", and the flag value of the reserved display flag is If it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending storage is two, for example, two pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display corresponds to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage For example, one reserved memory display is displayed in the display mode of "○", and one reserved memory display is displayed in the display mode of "☆" in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (toward the center of the screen in this characteristic portion 193SG) in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory.

In other words, if the pending memory of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 193SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It comes to be displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 193SG, the form of executing the processing of step 193SGS252 in the pre-reading notice setting processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D And the process for updating the pending display of the second pending storage display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning at step 193SGS242, execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the holding storage at the starting winning is determined. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 193SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on the execution and non-execution of the advance notice effect. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored reserved memory and the newly stored reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect, but this invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

14-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 193SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols. A combination of symbols other than the above-described chance symbols (lost symbols) is determined. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle A combination of reach-losses with different symbols (losing symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect during variable display (step 193 SGS277; Y), advance notice effect determination processing for variable display to execute a pseudo-continuous effect (for non-execution of pseudo-continuous effect) is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. If the variation pattern is the super ready-to-win variation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to execute a special temporary stop notification effect instead of the temporary stop notification effect based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). . The temporary stop notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the temporary stop of the decorative symbols by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. , The special temporary stop notification effect is to temporarily stop the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The decoration pattern is temporarily stopped by updating the background image according to the number of times (first special background image if the number of times of temporary stop is 1, second special background image if it is 2, and third special background image if it is 3). is an effect for informing the player of

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193SGS281). If it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (step 193SGS281; Y), a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is selected, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

When the variation pattern is the normal reach variation pattern (193SGS279; N) or when it is determined not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. 1.5 seconds (step 193SGS283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and variation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

Further, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect during variable display (step 193 SGS277; N), a variable display announcement effect determination process that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect is executed and variable display is being performed. It determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the notice effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

At step 193SGS287, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected at any one of 193SGS282, 193SGS284, and 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 193SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, the production control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 193SGS289). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the next process data is switched to and the next process is started again. By starting a timer and controlling the performance device according to the next process data, variable display of the decoration pattern is executed. Note that the effect control CPU 120 can execute a notice effect execution process for executing a notice effect in the effect process during variable display when execution of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process. .

Next, the flow of variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (A), when the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display, first, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped after reaching the reach. A suggesting temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. It should be noted that the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characterizing portion 193SG is such that after the decoration symbols are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo continuous symbols are displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C. is a production that performs variable display at a slower speed than usual. The length of the temporary stop suggestion effect period differs according to the length of the temporary stop notification effect period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

When the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends at the first temporary stop timing A, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed. A stop is executed and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for two seconds. Further, when the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends at the first temporary stop timing B, and the pseudo A temporary stop of consecutive symbols is executed, and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 14-23(A), the temporary stop notification effect period A and the temporary stop notification effect period B are at the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification effect has effect periods of 1.5 seconds and 2 seconds. It is always set to end at a specific timing regardless of whether it is determined in seconds.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect ends, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. In the re-variable display notification effect, in addition to outputting re-variable display notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, a character image corresponding to the number of re-variable displays is displayed on the image display device 5 (if the number of re-variable displays is the first time, character A , the image of character B for the second time, and the image of character C for the third time) to inform the player that the re-variable display of the decoration pattern will be executed.

Note that the first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification effect. When the re-variable display notification effect ends, the first variable display start frequency notification effect is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification effect. In the first variable display start number notification effect, the number of variable display times of the decoration pattern including the number of re-variable display times is displayed on the image display device 5, and effect images of colors corresponding to the number of variable display times are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. It is a production that displays In other words, the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the first re-variable display is to display "x2" on the image display device 5 and to display blue effect images on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the second re-variable display, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. , and the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the third re-variable display is to display "x4" on the image display device 5, and red This is a production that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start frequency notification effect is completed, the second variable display start frequency notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. The second variable display start frequency notification effect is an effect for displaying the variable display frequency of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display frequency on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start frequency notification effect.

After the second variable display start frequency notification effect is completed, the ready-to-win state is reached again, and the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed. At this time, the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

As shown in FIG. 14-23(B), when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect is not to be executed and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, As in the case where the variation pattern shown in FIG. 14-23 (A) is the normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, after reaching the reach, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the first pseudo continuous effect Temporary stop and re-variable display of symbols, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start frequency notification effect, second variable display start frequency notification effect, first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed. After that, it becomes reach again, and the temporary stop and re-variable display of the second pseudo-continuous pattern, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, and second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed. be done. Then, after the second variable display start frequency notification effect is completed for the second time, the ready-to-win state is reached again, and the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed. At this time, the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). , If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, in the second variable display start frequency notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect, the first variable display start frequency notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect are performed on the image display device 5. In contrast, "x3" (in the second variable display start count notification effect, "x3" of a smaller size than the second variable display start count notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-25, when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect is not to be executed and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 23(B) is the super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, a temporary stop suggesting effect after reaching the ready-to-win, and the pseudo-continuous pattern up to the second time, respectively. Temporary stop and re-variable display, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start frequency notification effect, and second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number of times notification effect is completed, the ready-to-win state is reached again. A first variable display start frequency notification effect and a second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed, and a super ready-to-win reach effect is also executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B ( 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character (character C) different from the first and second re-variable display effects is displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, in the third variable display start count notification effect and the second variable display start count notification effect, the image display device 5 performs the second variable display start count notification effect and the second variable display start count notification effect. In contrast, "x4" (in the third second variable display start count notification effect, "x4" of a smaller size than in the third first variable display start count notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-26, when execution of a special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during variable display, first, a temporary stop is performed. Suggestion production is executed.

In the variable display, when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the temporary stop of the decoration pattern is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. . That is, in the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification The performance period remains unchanged.

After the end of the special temporary stop notification performance, the first re-variable display of the decoration pattern is executed without executing the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start frequency notification performance. In addition, after a while, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed. That is, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, or the first variable display start frequency notification effect is displayed. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the image display device 5 as the second variable display start count notification effect displays "x2" in a size smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect. " is displayed only.

After the temporary stop and re-variable display of the first decoration pattern, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and re-variable display of the decoration pattern, special After the provisional stop notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed, the super ready-to-win reach effect is further executed.

As for the second variable display start count notification effect for the second time, the image display device 5 displays "x3" in a size smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect, as in FIG. 14-23(B). is executed.

As shown in FIG. 14-27, when execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during variable display, FIG. 14-26 Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decoration pattern up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the third decoration pattern provisional A stop and re-variable display, a special temporary stop notification effect, and a second variable display start times notification effect are executed, and a super ready-to-win reach effect is executed.

As for the third variable display start frequency notification effect, the image display device 5 displays "x4" in a size smaller than the first variable display start frequency notification effect, as in FIG. 14-23(B). is executed.

It should be noted that, as partially described above, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the characteristic portion 193SG is that the temporary stop notification sound is output to the speaker 8L from the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. , 8R to inform the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped, and is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

In the special temporary stop notification effect, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect, and in addition, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped. (1st special background image if the number of times of temporary stop is 1st, 2nd special background image if it is 2nd, 3rd special background image if it is 3rd) according to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern This is an effect to notify the player. Note that the special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the next special background image is updated or until the variable display is completed. The sound output period (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and displaying a character image corresponding to the number of re-variable displays on the image display device 5 (if the re-variable display count is the first time, the character A image, character B image for the second time, and character C image for the third time) to inform the player that the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed. Note that the duration of the re-variable display notification effect (the character image display period on the image display device 5 and the re-variable display notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the re-variable display is performed. seconds. In addition, as described above, in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect, the larger the number of times of execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (the number of times of temporary stop/re-variable display), the higher the expectation of the big hit is set. As for the display/notification effect, the degree of expectation for the big win is set to be the highest when the image of the character C is finally displayed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is set to be the lowest when the image of the character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is for notifying the number of times the variable display of decorative symbols including the re-variable display is started during one variable display after the re-variable display is started as a pseudo-continuous effect. The number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second first variable display The effect is to display "x3" in the number-of-starts notification effect, and to display "x4" in the third-time variable-display start-numbers notification effect. It should be noted that the effect period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect is one second regardless of the number of variable display times of the decorative symbols including the re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times the variable display of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the first variable display start number notification effect. , the number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, the second first variable display start number notification effect This is an effect in which "x3" is displayed in the effect, and "x4" is displayed in the third time also in the first variable display start frequency notification effect in a size smaller than that of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. It should be noted that the effect period of the second variable display start frequency notification effect is two seconds regardless of the number of variable display times of the decorative symbols including the re-variable display.

FIG. 14-29(A) is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 14-22. In the announcement effect determination process (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random value for determining the execution of the announcement effect is extracted, and the random value and a table for determining the announcement effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the announcement effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the announcement to be executed. An effect is determined (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-29(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%. , the execution of the group notice effect is decided at a ratio of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a ratio of 30%.

Note that the cut-in notice effect is a effect in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-29(F), and the group notice effect is shown in FIG. This is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed across the display area of the image display device 5 as shown.

If the variable display result is out and the super reach variation pattern (super reach out) is determined, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 40%, execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided at a rate of 30%, and the group The execution of the notice performance is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is out and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach out) is determined, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%. The execution of the notice performance is determined at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect in the characteristic portion 193SG, the expectation for the big hit is set to the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only is executed, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when only is executed, and the expectation of a big hit is set highest when both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed as the notice effect (pseudo continuous Expectations for big hits related to advance notice effects in variable display that executes effects: cut-in advance notice effects + group advance notice effects>group advance notice effects>cut-in effects>non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the notice effect has been determined (execution of at least one of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect has been determined) (step 193SGS303). If execution of any of the advance notice effects has not been determined (step 193SGS303; N), the advance notice effect determination processing (for execution of pseudo continuous effects) is terminated, and execution of any of the advance notice effects is determined (step 193SGS303; Y) stores the determined announcement effect, sets the announcement effect start waiting timer, and ends the announcement effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the period during which these advance notice effects can be executed overlaps the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start frequency notification effect period. In particular, when it is decided to execute both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect as the notice effect, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed during the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start times notification effect period. The production is performed in duplicate.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when execution of any of the notice effects is determined in the notice effect determination processing (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the same notice effect is executed in all the re-variable display notification effect periods. (See Figures 14-29 to 14-31).

FIG. 14-30(A) is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 14-22. In the announcement effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random value for determining the execution of the announcement effect is extracted, and the random value and a table for determining the announcement effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the announcement effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and the announcement to be executed. The effect is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-30(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided at a rate of 30%. , and execution of the group announcement effect is determined at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is out and the super reach variation pattern (super reach out) is determined, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 40%, execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided at a rate of 35%, and the group Execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, if the variable display result is out and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach out) is determined, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%. Execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the characteristic portion 193SG, the expectation for the big hit is set to the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only is executed, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect The expectation of big hit is set higher than when only is executed (expectation of big hit regarding advance notice effect in variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effect: group notice effect>cut-in effect>non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 193SGS313). If the execution of the notice effect has not been decided (step 193SGS313; N), the notice effect decision processing (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) is terminated, and if the execution of the notice effect has been decided (step 193SGS313; Y), The decided notice effect is stored, and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to end the notice effect determination process (for non-execution of pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

In addition, when the notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, the notice effect may be executed during any period from the start timing of the variable display to the ready-to-reach timing.

FIG. 14-31(A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at step 193SG280 in FIG. 14-22. At step 193SG280 in FIG. 14-22, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the special temporary stop notification effect (execute the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20% if the variable display result is a big hit (super reach jackpot). Execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is lost (super reach lost), non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of the special temporary stop notification effect ( non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the special temporary stop notification effect is executed in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect (temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the image When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when the temporary stop notification sound is only output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; When the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the expectation of the big hit is set higher than .

Further, as described above, focusing on the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image is displayed in response to the first temporary stop of the decoration symbol. Although only the first special background image is displayed on the display device 5, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 is displayed in response to the temporary stop of the decoration symbol for the first time. After the first special background image is displayed on the second special background image, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image (the first special background image ), and the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image (from the second special background image) in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. (updated to the third special background image).

In other words, regarding the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation for the big hit is set. is the third special background image, the expectation for the big win is set to be the highest, and the expectation for the big win is the lowest for the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 being the first special background image. The set (big hit expectation regarding the special background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: 3rd special background image > 2nd special background image > 1st special background image ).

FIG. 14-31(B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 14-22. At step 193SG283 in FIG. 14-22, if the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification effect period B (1 second) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). That is, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, if the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is 1. The big hit expectation is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (the big hit expectation regarding the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect : Temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) > Temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds)).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, the form in which the temporary stop notification effect period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification effect period is It may be determined uniquely in one period, or may be determined from three or more periods.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 193SG, the longer the temporary stop notification effect period is, the higher the expectation of the big hit is than the short temporary stop notification effect period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a short temporary stop notification effect period may have a higher expectation for a big hit than a long temporary stop notification effect period.

Next, the output mode of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R during variable display will be described. As shown in FIG. 14-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting BGM (music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification effect period. The speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggesting sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start frequency notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggesting sound is output only during the temporary stop suggesting production period, the temporary stop information sound is output only during the temporary stop information production period, the re-variable display information sound is output only during the re-variable display information production period, The 1 variable display start count notification sound is output only during the first variable display start count notification effect period.

Further, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in notice effect sound and a group notice effect sound. Of these, the cut-in notice effect sound is output only during the cut-in notice effect execution period when execution of the cut-in notice effect has been decided, and the group notice effect sound is output only when execution of the group notice effect has been decided. If there is, it is output only during the execution period of the group announcement effect.

That is, as shown in FIG. 14-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the BGM output is limited, the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification effect period. Furthermore, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggesting sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the temporary stop suggesting effect period, while the speakers 8L and 8R output the first variable display start count notification effect period. In addition to the first variable display start frequency notification sound, a maximum of four types of sounds including BGM, cut-in notice effect sound, and group notice effect sound are output.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 14-33, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 draws the image data 2 from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5. Moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols is executed. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. The pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 2 is not drawn from the display image data switching timing, that is, the pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 2 is not displayed from the display image data switching timing.

In addition, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1 from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols at the speed V1. The temporary stop suggesting image is displayed from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo continuous symbols at the speed V1 to the display image data switching timing period, and is not displayed (is hidden) during the other period.

Further, immediately before the display image data switching timing, the display of the pseudo-continuous pattern in the central portion of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3 . The pseudo-continuous pattern drawn by the image data 3 does not move (at a speed of 0) until the display image data switching timing. The display is moved at a speed V3, which is higher than . The moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 is not displayed when the pseudo-continuous pattern moves out of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Further, from the display image data switching timing, by drawing with the image data 2, the moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 is executed. The moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) which is higher than the speed V1 and lower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. The moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern continues until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . The display of the concentration line is displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then displayed at a density D2 which is higher than D1. That is, the number of concentration lines displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5 . Then, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1 again from the display image data switching timing, and then are not displayed.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggesting effect period in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect to the display image data switching timing, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1, thereby displaying the right and left decorations. The visibility of the patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. (Visibility: Medium). Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower due to the change in the concentration line density from D1 to D2. (Visibility: Low).

Further, from the timing of switching the display image data to the timing of ending the display of the concentrated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher than when the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D2 because the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D1. Higher (visibility: medium). After the display end timing of the concentrated line, the display of the concentrated line is finished (not displayed), so that the left and right decoration patterns have the highest visibility (visibility: high).

As shown in FIG. 14-34, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2, from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed. The moving display of the pseudo continuous symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols). The period required from the variable display start timing to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols is the period required from the variable display start timing to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo continuous symbols shown in FIG. 14-33 are not temporarily stopped. are identical. Further, after the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop notification effect is executed, but during the temporary stop notification effect execution period, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. hidden after

Further, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the image display device 5 executes the display of the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . As for the display of the concentration lines, the concentration line density (display density) is displayed at D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern). , is hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . The display of the concentration line is displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then displayed at a density D2 which is higher than D1. That is, the number of concentration lines displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5 . Then, the concentration line is not displayed from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggesting effect period in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect to the display image data switching timing, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1, thereby displaying the right and left decorations. The visibility of the patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. (Visibility: Medium). Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower due to the change in the concentration line density from D1 to D2. (Visibility: Low). Further, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern, display of the concentration line is finished (not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIGS. 14 to 34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the period of the temporary stop notification effect, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, and the image data 1 is drawn to display the decorative symbol. is displayed around the pseudo-continuous pattern. After that, the display of the temporary stop notification effect image of the decoration pattern is switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 14-35). It should be noted that the effect image for temporary stop notification in this characteristic portion 193SG is an image whose transmittance is set to 0%.

That is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion effect execution period (visibility: medium) due to the concentration line being temporarily hidden, but the image display device Due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area 5, the left and right decoration patterns become invisible (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols in the image data 2 ends, the speed V2 of the pseudo-continuous symbols toward the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) by drawing the image data 2 as well. movement display is executed. At this time, since the moving display (enlarged display) of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible again.

In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 are performed. Movement display of the decoration pattern (variable display) is not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 193SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-35 to 14-47.

First, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. When the time elapses, the decoration symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and become ready-to-win. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward from above in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach-loose which does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. It moves downward on the image display device at a speed of V2 and disappears. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (one of PA2-2 to PA2-4 and PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (E) At the same time, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-35(F) and 14-35(G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) and 14-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-continuous pattern with the plurality of cracks explodes, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is formed as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (I) and 14-36 (J) An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-37(K) to 14-37(P), the first re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if execution of the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effects and the cut-in notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A group announcement effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the first variable display start frequency notification effect for the first time, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5, and both the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the blue effect image starts to be displayed. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits blue light.

It should be noted that the image of "x2" displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification effect for the first time is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size to be non-displayed. display (see FIGS. 14-37 (O) and 14-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, the blue light emission of the second movable body 193SG033 ends, and the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position. Also, as the first second variable display start count notification effect, an image of “×2” size smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5 .

Shortly after the first second variable display start count notification effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. In 5L and 5R, after the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and become ready-to-win, as the second temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It moves at speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the variation pattern PA2-2 of the normal reach loss or the variation pattern PB1-2 of the normal reach jackpot in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (U), The pseudo-continuous symbols are moved downward on the image display device at a speed V2 without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, and PB1-4) in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed two or more times, FIG. 14-38 (V) , the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-38(W) and 14-38(X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. The green light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends as it becomes invisible to the player. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (X) and 14-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-continuous pattern with the plurality of cracks explodes, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is formed as shown in FIGS. 14-39 (Z) and 14-39 (a). An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-40(b) to 14-40(h), the second re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Furthermore, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A preview effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the second first variable display start frequency notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image of "x 3", and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the green effect image starts to be displayed. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits green light.

It should be noted that the image of "x 3" displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start frequency notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size to be non-displayed. display (see FIGS. 14-40(f) and 14-40(g)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect is completed, a second variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5, and a size of “×3” smaller than that of the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed. image is displayed.

Shortly after the second variable display start count notification effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. In 5L and 5R, after the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and become ready-to-win, as the third temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It moves at speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the variation pattern PA2-3 of the super reach losing and the variation pattern PB1-3 of the super reach jackpot in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed only twice, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (h). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern is moved to the lower part of the image display device at the speed V2 without being temporarily stopped and is not displayed. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed two or more times, FIG. 14-41(i) , the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-41(j) and 14-41(k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting red light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-41(k) and 14-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-continuous pattern in which the plurality of cracks are displayed explodes, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is configured as shown in FIGS. 14-42 (m) and 14-42 (n) An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-43(o) to 14-43(u), the third re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A preview effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the third first variable display start frequency notification effect, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, and both the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the display of the red effect image is started. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits red light.

It should be noted that the "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification effect is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size. (See FIGS. 14-43(s) and 14-43(t)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect is completed, a third variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5, and a size of “×4” smaller than that of the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed. image is displayed.

Here, the execution time of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 14-44(A) and 14-44(B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo consecutive symbols are directed downward at the speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above. , and the concentration lines are displayed at a density of D2. As the temporary stop suggesting effect progresses, the pseudo consecutive symbols approach the temporary stop position, and at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative symbol), the speed V1 A pseudo-continuous design (pseudo-continuous design drawn with image data 3) different from the pseudo-continuous design (pseudo-continuous design drawn with image data 2) moving with is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous design. be.

Then, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. The effect image for is displayed, and the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved from the retracted position to the first effect position is colored according to the number of temporary stops (pseudo consecutive times) (blue for the first temporary stop, blue for the second It emits light in green when it is temporarily stopped, and in red when it is temporarily stopped for the third time. Also, at this time, the concentration lines displayed on the image display device 5 are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, when the decorative symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. (Pseudo-continuous pattern drawn with image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-consecutive pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn with image data 2), which had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1, is hidden. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2, moves downward on the image display device 5, and disappears. At the same time, moving display of normal decorative patterns is performed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is performed).

The concentration lines displayed on the image display device 5 change in density from D2 to D1 (the number of displayed concentration lines decreases) from the timing when the pseudo continuous pattern starts to move at the speed V2. Then, the concentration lines after the density has changed to D1 are not displayed after a certain period of time after the pseudo continuous pattern is not displayed on the image display device 5 .

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 14-44 (F) and 14-44 (G), after the concentrated line is hidden, the decoration except for the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C for a while. After the variable display is executed in the pattern, the ready-to-win effect is executed according to the variation pattern, and finally the decorative pattern indicating the big hit or the loss is derived and displayed. In the decorative pattern display area 5C, the decorative patterns of numbers other than "1" which is a winning combination or "1" which is a losing combination are stopped). That is, in the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of the concentration line continues even after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentration line is not displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbols stop with a combination of a big hit or a loss (more precisely, before the ready-to-win effect is started).

As described above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. During the temporary stop suggesting effect period, the concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1, so that the visibility of the displayed decoration pattern becomes lower than before the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed (visibility: low). . In addition, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the “right” and “left” decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are further reduced in visibility (visual recognition gender: medium).

In addition, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification effect period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous symbol from the start timing of the temporary stop notification effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbol). Visibility is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion production period (visibility: medium).

In addition, after the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification effect period, during the remaining temporary stop notification effect period (player side of the pseudo continuous symbol) It becomes invisible to the player during the moving display toward ) and the re-variable display notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start frequency notification effect, the left and right decoration patterns are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative patterns are displayed in the center of the image display device 5, such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., by partially overlapping to provide a temporary stop notification effect. It has the same visibility (visibility: medium) as immediately after the start of

After that, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in an enlarged manner (moving and displayed toward the player side) such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., so that they cannot be visually recognized by the player. After that, the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to a small display in the upper left part of the image display device 5, so that the visibility is the highest (visibility: high). becomes.

14-36 to 14-37, 14-39 to 14-40, and 14-42 to 14-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the Although the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect is different (the re-variable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of the stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect may partially overlap. For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 to 14-37, when the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes and is displayed moving forward on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern ( For example, the character "E") is erased after being displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, while the character as a re-variable display notification effect on the back side of a part of the pseudo continuous pattern to start displaying the image of By doing so, the image of the character is gradually made visible to the player in the process of erasing the pseudo-continuous symbols, thereby improving the production effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform the transition of the image that is being displayed without a sense of incompatibility.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-35(H), etc., in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as a temporary stop notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are cracked, and the image itself explodes. Although the mode of display has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image with cracks and the image with explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying an image in which cracks appear in the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5, an image in which smoke or light is generated from these cracks is displayed. Then, the simulated consecutive symbols are made difficult for the player to see by the image of the smoke or light, and an image of explosion may be displayed instead of the simulated consecutive symbols. By doing so, it is also possible to shift the image displayed on the image display device 5 without a sense of discomfort.

Next, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. Reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at a lower speed (speed V1) than usual in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Simultaneously with the termination of the temporary stop replay period, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 14-46 (D) to 14-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the display of the first special background image is started on the image display device 5, and the first special background image is displayed. The re-variable display of the decoration pattern of is started. At this time, when execution of cut-in notice effect and group notice effect is determined at the start of variable display, these cut-in notice effect and group notice effect are executed overlapping with re-variable display notification effect.

Then, when the cut-in effect and the group advance notice effect are completed, the first second variable display start frequency notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start frequency notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 14-47 (I) to 14-47 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the temporary stop of the second decorative pattern While the image is displayed on the second special background image, the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, and the second second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and the third decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed on the third special background image, and the re-variable display of the decoration pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, A third second variable display start count notification effect is executed. Then, the ready-to-win effect is executed and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a loss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, the image display device 5 displays concentration lines at the density D1 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. After the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by this, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at a density of D2, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed by the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the temporary stop. As the temporary stop notification effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped by displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative symbols invisible. It can increase the feeling of exaltation for

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-44, in the case where the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the concentration line continues even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the continuous display of the concentration line is continued even after the timing when the pseudo continuous symbols are supposed to be temporarily stopped, so that the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. The player can easily recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not stop temporarily, and the player's disappointment caused by the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not temporarily stop can be alleviated, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-33, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D2 before the display image data switching timing. Later, since the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is higher after the switching timing of the display image data than before the switching timing of the display image data. In other words, after the timing of switching the display image data, by increasing the transparency of the concentration lines, the player is made to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbols will not temporarily stop, and attention to the background image is increased through the concentration lines. As a result, the player's disappointment over the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, before the decorative pattern of the combination that becomes a big hit or loses in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C together with the left and right decorative patterns is stopped. Since the concentration line is hidden at the end, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the stop of the decoration pattern after the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern is the temporary stop.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-35(G) to 14-35(H), when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are cracked and exploded (an image in which the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the player), the operation of the second movable body 193SG033 and the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed. The player can be further impressed that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped by the display of the explosion.

In particular, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position as a temporary stop notification effect. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the second movable body 193SG033 prevents the pseudo consecutive symbols from becoming difficult for the player to visually recognize, and informs the player that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped. can impress.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as an example of deformation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the pseudo-continuous pattern may change to a specific shape (for example, a circle or triangle), or the size of the pseudo-continuous pattern may be different from that before the temporary stop.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first effect position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, in addition to or instead of the second movable body 193SG033, the movable body 32 is moved to the first effect position or a position different from the first effect position, when viewed from the front. may be moved to a position overlapping at least part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved before the pseudo continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. Since the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position, the player can easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden from the image display device 5 by the movement of the second movable body 193SG033.

Further, in the variable display of the characteristic portion 193SG, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed up to three times. The image display device 5 displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. according to the number of re-variable displays as the 1-variable display start number notification effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-37(O), when the first variable display start count notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and Since some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are overlapped when viewed from the front, "x2", "x3", Attention can be drawn to the display of "x4" or the like, and the performance effect can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (O), 14-40 (f), and 14-43 (s), the second movable The first variable display start count is obtained by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green when displaying "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red when displaying "x4". It is possible to prompt the player's attention to the display of the notification effect, and improve the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, when the first variable display start count notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", " Although a part of the display such as "x3" and "x4" overlaps when viewed from the front, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variable display start count notification effect is executed. Sometimes, the display of the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may completely overlap.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, 14-35, and 14-44, as a temporary stop suggesting performance, a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed as a temporary stop suggesting image in the central portion of the image display device 5, and a central line is displayed. is displayed, the display control of the temporary stop suggestion effect by the effect control CPU 120 is facilitated, and when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (shown in FIG. 14-3 It is possible to prevent the switching from the image data to the image data shown in FIG. 14-4 from becoming unnatural. Especially after the display image data switching timing, since the pseudo-continuous pattern moves downward from the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 in advance as a temporary stop suggesting image. By doing so, it is possible to switch the image data at the switching timing of the display image data in a different and natural manner that makes the player feel even more uncomfortable.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this characteristic portion 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 is drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4. An image can be displayed on the image display device 5 by synthesizing the data. In particular, a pseudo-continuous pattern as a temporarily stopped image is drawn as image data 1 with the highest display priority, and decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns are drawn as image data 2 with a display priority lower than that of image data 1. Since the concentration line as the stop suggesting effect is drawn as the image data 4 with the lowest display priority, the decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous pattern during the moving display (during the variable display), the pseudo continuous pattern as the temporary stop suggesting image, the temporary It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of concentration lines as a stop-suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-35(H), 14-36(I), and 14-36(J), a pseudo continuous symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When it explodes and moves to the front side, while the left and right decorative patterns are invisible to the player, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (O), the first variable display start number notification effect When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player, so the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (especially (display of "x2", etc.) can be enhanced, and the left and right decoration patterns can be visually recognized by the player during the first variable display start frequency notification performance, so that the re-variable display is executed. can be easily recognized by the player.

14-35 (H), FIG. 14-36 (I), FIG. 14-36 (J), etc., where the pseudo consecutive symbols are exploded and displayed, and FIG. 14-37 (O), 14-37(P), etc., where displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are moved and displayed are both moving displays (enlarged displays) toward the player side. ), the effects of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start frequency notification effect can be enhanced by these moving displays directed toward the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-33, in the case where the simulated continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the simulated continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the simulated continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing is V1. Since the moving speed of the continuous symbols is V3, the player determines whether it is before or after the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped (before the display image data switching timing) depending on the moving speed of the pseudo continuous symbols. later) can be easily grasped by the player.

In this characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the display image data switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be faster than the moving speed of the pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-34, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V1, but the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the timing is V2, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols can be performed before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols. can be easily understood.

In particular, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary stop move downward from above, but the pseudo consecutive symbols after the temporary stop are the player's Since it moves toward the side (front side), it is possible for the player to more easily understand whether it is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo consecutive symbols. Misidentification can be prevented.

In this characterizing portion 193SG, an example is given in which the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbols differs before and after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols. The moving direction of the pseudo continuous symbols may be the same before and after the continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. Further, if the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop, the movement does not have to be toward the player side (front side). good.

In this characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the display image data switching timing is equal to the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the display image data switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo consecutive patterns are not temporarily stopped, the image of the pseudo consecutive patterns is displayed before the display image data switching timing. and the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped, the period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed before the display image data switching timing (the effect period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed) and the display image data switching The period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed after the timing may be different. That is, in the present invention, ``the movement speed of the specific effect identification information (the pseudo-continuous pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG) is different'' means that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern is different, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed. The period during which the symbols are displayed (demonstration period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed) is also included.

Although the characteristic portion 193SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG, by displaying a concentration line on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Although the form in which the player's attention is exemplified as to whether or not to temporarily stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 193SG-1 is shown in FIGS. 14-48(A) to 14-48. As shown in (D), the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggesting effect, and the temporary stop suggesting effect progresses (the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5). ), the central line may be moved toward the center of the image display device 5 and displayed. By doing so, the player can specify that there is a possibility that the pseudo consecutive symbols will stop at the center of the image display device 5, so if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the game This makes it easier for the driver to recognize that the driver did not make the temporary stop.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, a concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. , the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED 293SG034) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the image display device 5 may display the concentration line in a color corresponding to the number of executions of the temporary stop suggesting effect. For example, the concentration line is displayed in blue when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the first time, the concentration line is displayed in green when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the second time, and the concentration line is displayed in red when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the third time. . By doing so, when the second movable body 193SG033 is caused to emit light as the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 emits light in the same color as the concentration line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect. can improve effectiveness.

In addition, in the characterizing part 193SG, the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect have been exemplified as the notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modification 193SG-3, as a notice effect, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern is changed from the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. An effect or the like that changes the direction of display may be made executable.

In this way, when it is possible to change the display mode of the decorative pattern or change the direction of the variable display as the notice effect, the first variable display start number notification effect "x2", "x In the case where the display of "3" and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the execution of the announcement effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to recognize that the re-variable display will be executed due to the execution of the advance notice effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 is configured to perform re-variable display without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the player. Although the present invention is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous symbols on the image display device 5 is improved. A visibility-impairing image to be lowered (for example, an image of a blast, etc.) may be displayed, and after the visibility-impairing image is hidden, the variable display may be performed again. By doing so, the visibility impeding image is displayed before the re-variable display is performed, so that it is easy to understand that the re-variable display is performed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate, which is a plate material having transparency and is capable of displaying the above-described visibility-impaired image by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface, is provided on the front side of the image display device 5 in the pachinko game machine 1 (image display device 5 and the player). In this way, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pseudo consecutive symbols displayed on the image display device 5. The impression can be enhanced, and the production effect of the visibility-impairing image can be enhanced.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is always moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 as it is and is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 193SG-5, even if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo A case may be provided in which the consecutive symbols once start moving downward on the image display device 5 and then return to the central portion of the image display device 5 and temporarily stop. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern when returning to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 By making the speed and the speed different, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 or after passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 once. You may

Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern returns to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5, the display of the concentration line may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo consecutive symbols return to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum number of pseudo continuous effects during variable display 3 times), a reach effect different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit than the reach effect of other super reach A high all-rotation reach effect, etc.) may be executed. It should be noted that when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display, even if the full-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed without going through the re-variable display notification effect after the temporary stop notification effect. good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as a pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center ("middle" decorative symbol display area 5C) in a state where symbols indicating the same numerical value are stopped in left and right decorative symbols (reach state). Although the temporary stop mode has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous symbols may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the ready-to-win state. Furthermore, as described above, as a pseudo-continuous effect, a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol may temporarily stop in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. As a pseudo-continuous effect, a decoration pattern different from the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. , and "334" and the like, a combination of so-called shift eyes, etc., the decoration design may be temporarily stopped in a specific combination.

(Description of characteristic portion 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characterizing portion 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characterizing portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, in this characterizing portion 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as that of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion described above is omitted.

The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for a player,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect images;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the specific image displayed on the display means is controlled to the advantageous state a part for executing the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13);
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
a pre-stage effect for moving and displaying the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E);
A first post-stage production (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (G) to FIG. the part that stops) and
A second post-stage effect, which is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image is continued after the execution of the pre-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F), the pseudo consecutive symbols continue without temporary stop The part that is displayed and hidden by moving) and
This is the characteristic part.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to grasp the success or failure of the suggestive effect, and the interest of the suggestive effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 2 is
In the preceding stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. is done) and
In the first stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed to temporarily make the specific image difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (G) , the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
In the second stage effect, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F), if the pseudo continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification part),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the translucent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be statically displayed, and that the specific image is stopped. Since it becomes difficult to see when it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of the stop display and to emphasize that the stop display has been performed.

The game machine of form 3 is
In the preceding stage production, effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
When the first post-stage effect is executed, the specific image is temporarily made invisible by displaying an opaque effect display when the first post-stage effect is executed (for example, FIG. 15-6 As shown in (G), a portion where an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second post-stage production is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect part where the image is not displayed),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. By making it difficult to see the image when it is statically displayed, it is possible to reduce discomfort during the static display and to emphasize the fact that the static display has been made, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the subsequent stage presentation.

The game machine of form 4 is
In the preceding stage production, effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
In the second stage production, the effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-7 (F) to 15-7 (H) as a modification 225SG-2, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving and displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern The part where the concentration line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden by the device 5),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. In the 2nd stage production as well, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display for a predetermined period from before the failure mode occurs until after the specific image is erased.

The game machine of form 5 is
In the preceding stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
In the second post-stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is deleted. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-8(F) to 15-8(H) as modification 225SG-3, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving the pseudo-continuous pattern. The part where the concentration line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden on the display device 5),
The game machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the translucent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. In the second post-stage production as well, the interest of the post-stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display for a predetermined period from before the failure mode occurs until after the specific image is erased.

The game machine of form 6 is
In the preceding stage effect display, a translucent, highly transparent and highly transmissive effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over the design),
In the first post-stage production, when the specific image is statically displayed, a low-transmittance effect display having a lower transparency than the high-transmittance effect display is displayed, thereby temporarily making the specific image difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-9 as a modified example 225SG-4, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5 to display a decorative pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern. The part that is difficult to see from the player),
In the second post-stage production, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification. is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be statically displayed, and that the specific image is stopped. By displaying the low-transmittance effect display at the time of display, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility during the stop display and to emphasize that the stop display has been performed.

The game machine of form 7 is
The first post-stage effect includes an effect in which the size of the specific image is larger than the size of the preceding stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily If you do, the part where the pseudo-continuous pattern after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The game machine according to any one of Modes 2 to 6, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of the statically displayed specific image, and to further emphasize the static display.

The game machine of form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the preceding stage production increases as the preceding stage production progresses (for example, as shown in FIGS. A portion where the concentration lines are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 2 to 7, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the static display of the specific image, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the preceding stage presentation.

The game machine of form 9 is
An announcement effect executing means capable of executing an announcement effect that foretells that a specific event will occur (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13),
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first post-stage production and the second post-stage production, the execution of the announcement production is restricted (for example, as a modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5, when the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed, the part that restricts the execution of the notice effect),
The gaming machine according to any one of Modes 2 to 8, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect from lowering the visibility of the notice effect and lowering the interest of the notice effect.

The game machine of form 10 is
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect) is displayed on the display means, and the preceding stage effect and the first latter stage effect or the preceding stage effect and the above A first suggestive effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect shown in FIG. 15-11(C) as modification 225SG-5) performing a second post-stage effect, and a display size smaller than the first specific image on the display means A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggesting effect) is displayed, and the front stage effect and the first rear stage effect or the front stage effect and the first stage effect are displayed. It is possible to execute a second suggestive effect (for example, the active display change suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F) as modification 225SG-5),
When the first post-stage effect is executed as the first suggestive effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmissive effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), the image display device 5 A portion that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% together with an image as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect),
When the first post-stage effect is executed as the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmissive effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F) , the image display device 5 displays an arrow image as an active display change notice effect, but does not display an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0%),
The gaming machine according to any one of Modes 2 to 9, characterized by:
According to this feature, in the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmissive effect display is not displayed when the first post-stage effect is executed, so the second specific image having a small display size can be understood by the effect display. You can prevent things from getting worse.

First, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figures 15-1(A) to 15-1(C), Figures 15-2(A) to 15-2(C) and Figures 15-3(A) to 15-3(C) In addition, for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Among them, FIG. 15-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as the temporary-stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG, and FIG. 15-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. FIG. 15-3 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-2(A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 15-1(A), the image data 2 is displayed from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display the saturated line toward .

As shown in FIGS. 15-1(B), 15-2(B), and 15-3(A), the image data 3 shows the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display moving display from top to bottom. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols are larger in size than during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 15-1(B), the left and right of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. (y>b)). This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decoration patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 225SG) from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(B), the image data 4 is a simulated image from the center of the image display device 5 toward the bottom immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the simulated continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 to 15-3, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. It is to be displayed with priority over moving display towards). Incidentally, since the concentration lines in the characteristic portion 225SG are set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), during execution of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the player can see decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration lines. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. Based on the image (a pseudo-continuous pattern that has a larger size than during the moving display due to the temporary stop) is displayed with priority. It should be noted that the effect image for notifying temporary stop is not displayed when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the re-variable display.

It should be noted that the transmittance of the temporary stop notification effect image in the characteristic portion 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 15-2(C) and 15-2(D), the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has passed, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of a decoration pattern different from the pseudo consecutive symbols) is displayed immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo consecutive symbols being temporarily stopped. ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the image display device 5 of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward).

In particular, in this characteristic portion 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123), in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, temporarily stops the pseudo continuous symbols regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped (see FIG. 14-33 of the characteristic part 193 described above). The image data to be displayed in FIG. 15-3 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2) in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped shown in FIG. 15-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 15-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(A) to 15-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The pattern stops (stops swinging) and becomes a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, Then, the central line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data so that as shown in FIG. 15-4(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 15-4(G) and 15-4(H), An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . As described above, the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to have a transmittance of 0%. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggesting effect. Further, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily made invisible by the above, and if the pseudo-continuous symbols do not stop temporarily as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed as an image without displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since the display is hidden after continuously moving toward the lower side of the display device 5, the player can see the success of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) and the failure of the effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) can be easily grasped, and the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect can be improved.

In addition, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentration line with high transmittance is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols being displayed in movement will be temporarily stopped. It can improve interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0, thereby reducing the player's discomfort during the temporary stop. In addition, since it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbols have been temporarily stopped, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the temporary suspension of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols at the time of the temporary stop are displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (because the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, the horizontal width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the vertical width dimension is y (y>b)). A temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, an example is shown in which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed in a size larger than before the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It can be timing.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols is emphasized by displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols in a larger size than before the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by changing the shape and color of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols is emphasized. You may

15-4(C) to 15-4(E), the present characteristic portion 225SG displays concentration lines on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and also displays a temporary stop suggesting effect. By moving and displaying the concentration line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped. It is possible to increase the expectation for the performance and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In this characteristic portion 225SG, by moving and displaying the concentration line toward the central portion of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the color of the concentration lines or increase the number of lines to be displayed according to the progress of the temporary stop indication effect (increase the density of the concentration lines). ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the characterizing portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, the characteristic portion 225SG draws concentrated lines as image data 2, and draws decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3. Although a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and modified example 225SG-1 is shown in FIGS. 15-5A to 15. As shown in -5(C), by drawing a concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns with priority over concentrated lines (concentrated lines are displayed as decorative patterns and may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo consecutive symbol).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 15-6(A) to 15-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentration line is drawn on the image display device 5 at the center of the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasizing whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and the concentration line makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. can be prevented.

Incidentally, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data so that as shown in FIG. 15-6(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 15-6(G) and 15-6(H), An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . As described above, the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to have a transmittance of 0%. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the central line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary-stop-indicating effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and to improve interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, after hiding the concentration line, the image display device is restarted without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbols. Although the mode of continuously moving downward and hiding has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are continuously moved downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. On the other hand, the concentration line may be displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time until the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modification 225SG-1, by displaying the concentration line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modification 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentration lines, and pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect. , the image display device 5 has exemplified a mode in which the concentration lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 15-8(A) to 15-8(H) as a modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, the concentration line is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern and the pseudo continuous pattern, In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, even if the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden in the image display device 5, good.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing portion 225SG, by displaying the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the central line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the characteristic portion 225SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily visually recognized. Although the form in which it is disabled has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 225SG-4, as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%) than the concentration line.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 15-10, during the period in which the concentration line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols), the transmittance of the concentration line is high (for example, , 50% described above) allows the player to easily visually recognize decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration line, while the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect ( In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% as described above), so that the player can see the decorative pattern and the pseudo pattern more than the period when the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing part 225SG, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentrated line with a relatively high transmittance is displayed, thereby providing a temporary stop suggesting effect suggesting that the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop, and the fact that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped is displayed through the temporary stop notification effect image. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve interest in temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

In addition, in the characterizing section 225SG, a mode in which a temporary stop suggesting effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo-continuous effect during variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, as an effect different from the temporary stop suggesting effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit (see FIG. 14-29 in the characteristic portion 193SG) may be executed. . Note that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. When is displayed, the execution of the notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the result of the variable display will result in a big win by executing the notice effect, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for notifying the temporary stop and the interest of the notice effect being lowered.

Further, as a notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. As a result of the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped, and a variable display that is being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the central lower part of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided for displaying the reserved storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and the active display An active display change notice effect suggesting that the display mode will change may be made executable.

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is executed as the advance notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, an image having a horizontal width dimension of L1 is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect, and a temporary stop notification is given when the transmittance is 0% on the image display device 5. The effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is started at the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. It is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. The effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing of the stop, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image is displayed from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F An image of an arrow flying toward it and having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2)) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice effect, an arrow flying from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display as shown in FIG. 15-11(F), the display mode of the active display changes, and the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice effect. It is sufficient that the arrow coming from the right side passes through the left side of the image display device 5 without sticking into the active display, and then becomes non-display.

As described above, in this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop, While temporarily making the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is not displayed on the image display device 5. , By displaying an image (image of an arrow) that is shorter in display size than the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand.

In this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. An image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestive effect, and an effect image for notifying a temporary stop having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5 as an example. The invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). 20% or 50%) effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed.

(Description of characteristic portion 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characterizing portion 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characterizing portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, in this characterizing portion 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as that of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion described above is omitted.

First, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figures 15-1(A) to 15-1(C), Figures 15-2(A) to 15-2(C) and Figures 15-3(A) to 15-3(C) In addition, for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Among them, FIG. 15-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as the temporary-stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG, and FIG. 15-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. FIG. 15-3 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-2(A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 15-1(A), the image data 2 is displayed from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display the saturated line toward .

As shown in FIGS. 15-1(B), 15-2(B), and 15-3(A), the image data 3 shows the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display moving display from top to bottom. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols are larger in size than during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 15-1(B), the left and right of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. (y>b)). This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decoration patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 225SG) from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(B), the image data 4 is a simulated image from the center of the image display device 5 toward the bottom immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the simulated continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 to 15-3, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. It is to be displayed with priority over moving display towards). Incidentally, since the concentration lines in the characteristic portion 225SG are set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), during execution of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the player can see decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration lines. It is visible.

Immediately after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, as shown in FIGS. Based on the image (a pseudo-continuous pattern that has a larger size than during the moving display due to the temporary stop) is displayed with priority. It should be noted that the effect image for notifying temporary stop is not displayed when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the re-variable display.

It should be noted that the transmittance of the temporary stop notification effect image in the characteristic portion 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 15-2(C) and 15-2(D), the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has passed, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of a decoration pattern different from the pseudo consecutive symbols) is displayed immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo consecutive symbols being temporarily stopped. ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the image display device 5 of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward).

In particular, in this characteristic portion 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123), in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, temporarily stops the pseudo continuous symbols regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped (see FIG. 14-33 of the characteristic part 193 described above). The image data to be displayed in FIG. 15-3 is changed from the image data (FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2) in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 15-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 15-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(A) to 15-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The pattern stops (stops swinging) and becomes a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, Then, the central line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data so that as shown in FIG. 15-4(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 15-4(G) and 15-4(H), An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . As described above, the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to have a transmittance of 0%. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggesting effect. Further, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily made invisible by the above, and if the pseudo-continuous symbols do not stop temporarily as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed as an image without displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since the display is hidden after continuously moving toward the lower side of the display device 5, the player can see the success of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern) and the failure of the effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) can be easily grasped, and the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect can be improved.

In addition, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentration line with high transmittance is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols being displayed in movement will be temporarily stopped. It can improve interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0, thereby reducing the player's discomfort during the temporary stop. In addition, since it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbols have been temporarily stopped, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the temporary suspension of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols at the time of the temporary stop are displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (because the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, the horizontal width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the vertical width dimension is y (y>b)). A temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, an example is shown in which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed in a size larger than before the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It can be timing.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols is emphasized by displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols in a larger size than before the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by changing the shape and color of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols is emphasized. You may

15-4(C) to 15-4(E), the present characteristic portion 225SG displays concentration lines on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and also displays a temporary stop suggesting effect. By moving and displaying the concentration line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped. It is possible to increase the expectation for the performance and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In this characteristic portion 225SG, by moving and displaying the concentration line toward the central portion of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the color of the concentration lines or increase the number of lines to be displayed according to the progress of the temporary stop indication effect (increase the density of the concentration lines). ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the characterizing portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, the characteristic portion 225SG draws concentrated lines as image data 2, and draws decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3. Although a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and modified example 225SG-1 is shown in FIGS. 15-5A to 15. As shown in -5(C), by drawing a concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns with priority over concentrated lines (concentrated lines are displayed as decorative patterns and may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo consecutive symbol).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 15-6(A) to 15-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentration line is drawn on the image display device 5 at the center of the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and the concentration line makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. can be prevented.

Incidentally, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data so that as shown in FIG. 15-6(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 15-6(G) and 15-6(H), An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . As described above, the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to have a transmittance of 0%. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the central line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary-stop-indicating effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the temporary stop can be reduced. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and to improve interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, after hiding the concentration line, the image display device is restarted without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbols. Although the mode of continuously moving downward and hiding has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are continuously moved downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. On the other hand, the concentration line may be displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time until the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modification 225SG-1, by displaying the concentration line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modification 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentration lines, and pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect. , the image display device 5 has exemplified a mode in which the concentration lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 15-8(A) to 15-8(H) as a modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, the concentration line is displayed with priority over the decoration pattern and the pseudo continuous pattern, In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, even if the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden in the image display device 5, good.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing portion 225SG, by displaying the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the central line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the characteristic portion 225SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily visually recognized. Although the form in which it is disabled has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 225SG-4, as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%) than the concentration line.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 15-10, during the period in which the concentration line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols), the transmittance of the concentration line is high (for example, , 50% described above) allows the player to easily visually recognize decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration line, while the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect ( In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% as described above), so that the player can see the decorative pattern and the pseudo pattern more than the period when the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern. It should be noted that although it is not shown in this modified example 225SG-4, if the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 will notify the temporary stop as in the other characteristic parts and the modified examples. Effect images for are not displayed.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing part 225SG, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentrated line with a relatively high transmittance is displayed, thereby providing a temporary stop suggesting effect suggesting that the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop, and the fact that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped is displayed through the temporary stop notification effect image. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve interest in temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

In addition, in the characterizing section 225SG, a mode in which a temporary stop suggesting effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo-continuous effect during variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 225SG-5, during the variable display, as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit (see FIG. 14-29 in the characteristic part 193SG) ) may be executable. Note that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. When is displayed, the execution of the notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the result of the variable display will result in a big win by executing the notice effect, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for notifying the temporary stop and the interest of the notice effect being lowered.

Further, as a notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. As a result of the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped, and a variable display that is being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the central lower part of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided for displaying the reserved storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and the active display An active display change notice effect suggesting that the display mode will change may be made executable.

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is executed as the advance notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, an image having a horizontal width dimension of L1 is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect, and a temporary stop notification is given when the transmittance is 0% on the image display device 5. The effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is started at the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. It is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. The effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing of the stop, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image is displayed from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F An image of an arrow flying toward it and having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2)) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice effect, an arrow flying from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display as shown in FIG. 15-11(F), the display mode of the active display changes, and the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice effect. It is sufficient that the arrow coming from the right side passes through the left side of the image display device 5 without sticking into the active display, and then becomes non-display.

As described above, in this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop, While temporarily making the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is not displayed on the image display device 5. , By displaying an image (image of an arrow) that is shorter in display size than the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand.

In this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. An image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestive effect, and an effect image for notifying a temporary stop having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5 as an example. The invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). 20% or 50%) effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbols is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous ) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display result corresponding to the reserved memory display can execute the reserved memory display change performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the pattern indicating that the reserved memory display changes (the reserved memory display change notification pattern) stops on the image display device 5 . In this way, when the pending memory display change notification pattern is stopped on the image display device 5, the provisional stop suggestion in the characteristic portion 193SG or the characteristic portion 225SG is targeted for whether or not the reserved memory display change notification pattern is stopped. An effect corresponding to the effect (suggestion effect in the present invention) may be made executable.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbols is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result during execution to be a big hit according to the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the pattern (background image change notification pattern) indicating that the game is to be stopped on the image display device 5 . When the background image change notification pattern is stopped on the image display device 5 as described above, the temporary stop suggestion effect in the characteristic portion 193SG or the characteristic portion 225SG is performed based on whether or not the background image change notification pattern is stopped. A corresponding effect (suggestive effect in the present invention) may be made executable.

Further, in the characterizing section 193SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game is at least the predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

In addition, in the present specification, a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications have been exemplified as the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. Alternatively, only one feature or variation may be implemented.

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbol is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed by a combination of decorative patterns (stopped pattern). An effect (suggestive effect in the present invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestive effect in the characteristic portion 193SG or the characteristic portion 225SG is executed for the stop of the symbol that is made suggestible and suggests that a specific set value is set. It may be possible.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decoration symbol display area 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Substrate, 21 gate switch, 22A first start switch, 22B second start switch, 23 count switch, 25A first hold indicator, 25B second hold display, 25C normal figure hold display, 30 batting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display controller.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information, deriving and displaying display results, and controlling the game machine to an advantageous state for a player,
a shooting means capable of shooting a game medium according to a player's operation;
Guidance display means for performing a guidance display urging the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area of the first area and the second area;
guidance light emitting means for emitting guidance light to prompt the player to shoot the game medium toward the second area by moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means;
As the variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed , the special identification information different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display is restarted. a specific effect executing means capable of executing the effect;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the special identification information temporarily stops ;
A notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped ,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display,
The guidance display means
performing the second guidance display in a first period of a predetermined period during which a start effect relating to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed;
performing the first guide display and the second guide display in a second period during the predetermined period and later than the first period;
During a period after the predetermined period, the second guidance display is performed while the first guidance display is terminated;
performing the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
The guidance light emitting means is
In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the guide light emission,
extinguishing the light emitting means before the second period starts;
When the second period starts, the first guide display is performed and the guide light is emitted;
The suggestive effect executing means is in a visual recognition state in which the special identification information and the effect identification information can be visually recognized by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect. After being temporarily lowered to the first low visibility state, the visibility is lowered to the second low visibility state, which is a visibility state in which the special identification information and the effect identification information are visible even though the visibility is lower than that of the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute a production that causes
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect,
When the special identification information does not temporarily stop after the suggestive effect is executed, the moving speed of the special identification information before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the special identification information after the predetermined timing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images